ST LIP-8000D series User Guide

ST LIP-8000D series User Guide
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Please read this manual carefully before
operating Phone. Retain it for future reference
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
1.2
Date
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Dec. 2012
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Changed the new CI (Ericsson-LG)
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions,
use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a
violation of Copyright Laws. Ericsson-LG reserves the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG in
this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in
all cases.
iPECS is trademarks of Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only Ericsson-LG approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the phone. If so, call the service center as this
may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or equipment damage.
5. Do not use the phone during a thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result in
fire, severe electrical or acoustic shock.
6. Do not use the power adapter if the power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause electric shock or damage the
equipment and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids such
as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do not clean with wax or silicon
products as these may enter the equipment and cause operation to become
unstable.
LIP-8004D
User Guide
[EU]
European Union Declarations of Conformity
Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. declare that the equipment specified in this document
bearing the “ CE” mark conforms to the European Union Radio and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive(R&TTE 1999/5/EC),
including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive(2004/108/EC) and Low
Voltage Directive(2006/95/EC).
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by
contacting your local sales representative.
[USA/CSA]
FCC/IC Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 /RSS-GEN of the FCC/IC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference; and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely
outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the
Canadian regulations.
CAUTION : Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
LIP-8004D
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVISION HISTORY ................................................................................................I
DISPOSAL OF YOUR OLD APPLIANCE ................................................................I
TABLE OF CONTENTS ...................................................................................I
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................... 1
FEATURE INFORMATION ....................................................................................................................... 1
FEATURE GROUPINGS .......................................................................................................................... 1
IPECS LIP-8004 PHONE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 2
LIP-8004D PHONE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 3
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Wiring Connectors ......................................................................................... 4
Power ............................................................................................................ 4
Wall Mount ..................................................................................................... 4
2. RECEIVING CALLS ........................................................................................... 5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
ANSWERING A CALL W HILE IDLE ...................................................................................................... 5
RESPONDING TO A CALL W HILE BUSY ............................................................................................ 5
DIFFERENTIAL RING SIGNALS............................................................................................................. 6
ANSWERING CALLS AT NIGHT ............................................................................................................ 7
ANSWERING CALLS TO OTHER STATIONS ..................................................................................... 7
USING DO-NOT-DISTURB (DND) TO BLOCK INCOMING CALLS ............................................ 8
FORWARDING CALLS ............................................................................................................................. 8
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail .............................................. 8
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number............................................................. 9
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message ............................................................. 11
3. PLACING CALLS .............................................................................................. 14
3.1 INTERNAL CALLS..................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ................................................... 14
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait................................................................................ 15
3.2 EXTERNAL CALLS ................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Placing external CO/VoIP calls ....................................................................... 15
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ......................................................... 17
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing ........................................... 17
To disable dialing from your phone ................................................................. 17
To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone .................................... 18
3.3 USING AUTOMATED DIALING ............................................................................................................. 18
i
LIP-8004D
User Guide
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) .................................................................... 18
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial .......................................................... 19
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers ................................................................ 19
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ............................................ 20
3.3.4 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name (iPECS-MG) ............................. 22
4. CALL HANDLING ............................................................................................ 23
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CALL TRANSFER: SENDING A CALL TO A DIFFERENT DESTINATION .................................... 23
CALL HOLD: PLACING A CALL IN A WAITING STATE ................................................................... 23
BROKER CALL: SWITCHING BETWEEN TWO CALLS ................................................................... 24
JOINING MULTIPLE PEOPLE IN A CONFERENCE .......................................................................... 24
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room ....................................................................... 25
4.5 CALL PARK: PLACING A CALL ON HOLD TO PAGE ...................................................................... 26
5. RETRIEVING & RESPONDING TO MESAGES .......................................... 28
5.1 RESPONDING TO A STATION MESSAGE W AITING INDICATION.............................................. 28
5.2 GETTING VOICE MAIL MESSAGES .................................................................................................. 28
6. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ......................................................................... 29
6.1 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ................................................................................. 29
6.2 MOBILE PHONE EXTENSION .............................................................................................................. 29
7. MISC. FEATURES ........................................................................................... 32
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
BACKGROUND MUSIC AND MUSIC ON HOLD (IPECS-LIK) .................................................. 32
USING INTERNAL, EXTERNAL AND MEET-ME PAGING ............................................................ 32
PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) PAGE ........................................................................................................... 33
W AKE-UP ALARM.................................................................................................................................. 34
ALARM/DOOR BELL .............................................................................................................................. 34
POWER FAIL TRANSFER ..................................................................................................................... 35
SYSTEM VOICE MEMO......................................................................................................................... 35
CONTRAST (IPECS-LIK) ................................................................................................................... 36
NETWORK CONFIG. .............................................................................................................................. 36
8. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN ............................................................................. 37
8.1 ACCESS PBX OR CENTREX .............................................................................................................. 37
8.2 ACCESS THE ISDN NETWORK ......................................................................................................... 37
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features .......................................... 37
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction ................................................................ 38
9. SET FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ........................................................... 39
9.1 ENTERING STATION PROGRAM DATA............................................................................................ 39
9.2 ASSIGNING FEATURES TO FLEX BUTTONS .................................................................................. 39
ii
LIP-8004D
User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ............................................... 40
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ....................................................... 46
APPENDIX C USEFUL INFORMATION : OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE
NOTICE 49
iii
LIP-8004D
1. Introduction
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1 General
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2 Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone, and moves on
to receiving and placing calls, and then to more
advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator and/or iPECS Technical
Manuals as needed).
NOTE—Under certain operation conditions, this
equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency
calls (loss of power, etc.). Alternative arrangements
should be made for access to emergency services.
1.3 Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls,
Placing calls etc. Within each group, features are
1
LIP-8004D
User Guide
arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1.4 iPECS LIP-8004 Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8004D Phone incorporates the latest in
VoIP technology and is intended for basic
communications (ex., a lobby or limited use phone). The
following image shows the LIP-8004D.
LIP-8004D Front and Back
Features are generally accessed using programmed
fixed, or flexible buttons, dial pad buttons, or dial codes
entered from the dial pad. In the remainder of this User
Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown with a
box surrounding the BUTTON designation. The following
image shows the phone and buttons are described.
iPECS LIP-8004D Diagram
2
LIP-8004D
User Guide
DND – Blocks all incoming calls; red LED illuminates.
Speed – Access speed dialing, speed programming,
save number redial and last number redial.
Vol   – Adjusts volume for ringing, headset, and
speakerphone; adjusts LCD brightness (in idle state).
Trans/PGM –Call transfer, or programming mode.
Hold/Save – Places active call on hold or saves
programming information.
Call Back – Initiates call back request when calling a
busy station; call connects when busy station is idle.
On-hook Dial – Allows User to place a call while onhook. Toggle to activate; red LED illuminates.
Flexible – Some are system pre-programmed for line
appearance, and some are user programmable.
Ring/MSG Indicator – Illuminates when ringing, or
message waiting.
LCD Display – Displays station number/current time or
telephone number of destination while talking.
1.5 LIP-8004D Phone Installation
LIP Phones and Consoles can be connected to any
standard 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in
graphic). When connected to an 802.3af compliant
switch port (ex., POE8), LIP Phones and series
consoles obtain power from the Ethernet port. When
LAN power is not available, the AC/DC adaptor must be
used. The following image shows how to connect the
handset, power cord, and LAN cable to the phone.
iPECS LIP-8004D Connections
3
LIP-8004D
User Guide
1.5.1 Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8004D has a single Ethernet port that is
connected to the LAN using a RJ-45 plug terminated
category 5 cable supplied with the Phone. A 2 meter (6
foot) cable is provided for desk mount installation.
Using the cable, one RJ-45 plug is inserted into the
"LAN" jack in the bottom of the Phone. The other RJ-45
plug is inserted into the RJ-45 jack previously wired to
an Ethernet switch port accessible by the MFIM. To
power the LIP Phone over the LAN, the switch port must
support POE (Power over Ethernet) standard 802.3af.
1.5.2 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
1.5.3 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions detail how to perform
a wall mount installation:
•
•
•
•
Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and tighten
the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch) of the screw
exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure the
phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and tighten
or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
4
LIP-8004D
User Guide
2. Receiving Calls
2. Receiving
Calls
2.1 Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered
by lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line button or a LOOP button. External calls are
from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed to
ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may
be assigned allowing others to answer the call before
the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc., will Recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in HandsFree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
• Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
• Lift the handset to respond.
2.2 Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
5
LIP-8004D
User Guide
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. When used audio is received from both the
active call and the Voice Over announcement.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals by: placing
the existing call on Hold and responding to the new
incoming call, activating One-time DND, sending a
Silent Text Message, or ignoring the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
• Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
• Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
• Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
• Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
• Select the desired message to send.
2.3 Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The LIP-8004D has 8
ring tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. The tones are stored in the phone
permanent memory.
In iPECS-LIK
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
• Lift Handset
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
• Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
6
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
• Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
• Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
2.4 Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
2.5 Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
• Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
7
LIP-8004D
User Guide
2.6 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb (DND) when you wish to not be
interrupted by pressing the DND button; the phone will
block incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast
busy tone and the display will show the DND status.
Activate Do-Not-Disturb while ringing (One-Time DND);
Ringing terminates and the caller will receive a fast busy
tone and it requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
• Press the DND button.
2.7 Forwarding Calls
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls,
when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
8
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or
internal system resource:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the programmed FWD or dial 554 (Call Forward code),
• Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
• Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD or dial 554,
• Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD or dial 554,
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD or dial 554,
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Press the # key.
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can
be forwarded from an internal station or a remote
location. You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1:
2:
Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded internally or externally.
Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
9
LIP-8004D
User Guide
3:
4:
No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the programmed FWD button or dial 554,
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD or dial 554,
• Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
• Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
• While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code
554,
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
10
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
• Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
• Dial Telephone number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
• Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
• Dial Telephone number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to callers. When calling your
Station, Internal callers will automatically receive the
selected message or you can send a text message you
select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you, see Station Speed Dial Character
entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-defined Text Messages;
some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown
in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
Message 03:
Message 04:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
11
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Message 05:
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
• Lift the handset,
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 51,
• Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
• Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
• Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
• Press the flashing programmed
• Press the # key.
12
FWD
button or dial 554,
LIP-8004D
User Guide
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 52,
• Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart,
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 41,
• Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
• Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
• Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
• Press the Fwd Soft button,
• Press FWD button or dial 554,
• Dial #.
13
LIP-8004D
User Guide
3. Placing Calls
3. Placing Calls
3.1 Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
• When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, speak
to the called party.
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
14
LIP-8004D
User Guide
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing just the last digit of the Intercom
number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
• While placing a call to a busy station, dial * and wait for an
answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
• While placing a call to a busy station, press the
button and hang-up.
CALL BACK
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
• Dial #, and after the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication with LED or ICON.
To activate Message Waiting:
• Press the CALL BACK .
3.2 External Calls
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-100, 001-200 for
iPECS-300 & 600).
15
LIP-8004D
User Guide
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access
801-820 for iPECS-100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing for banking
services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
To place an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
• Dial the desired number.
16
LIP-8004D
User Guide
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
• Select/dial a busy CO/IP line,
• Press the CALL BACK ,
• Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
becomes available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. When an
Account Code is entered, it is output from the system
to a printer in the SMDR report. An Account Code Flex
button can be programmed (refer to Assigning features
to Flex buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 550,
• Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
• Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
• Place the CO/IP call as normal.
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the Station’s Authorization code.
17
LIP-8004D
User Guide
To activate Temporary COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization code,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
• Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
• Place call as normal.
3.3 Using Automated Dialing
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer.
In iPECS-LIK
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial *,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
18
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Press Speed Soft button,
• Dial *,
• or
• press the LOG Soft button,
• Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 100 numbers dialed or received,
• Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Saved Number Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED .
• Dial #
To store a number in the Saved Number Dial:
• While on an outgoing external call, press SPEED twice.
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800
System Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The
iPECS-300 & 600 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
19
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for
iPECS-100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 or 600).
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated
memory for 20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 0019) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 each
support 100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins (000099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50
Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-049). These
numbers are entered at the user’s station and may
include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special
instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1
digit—Send digits as ISDN
Keypad Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
st
‘*’ not as 1 digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as in the
chart shown.
20
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and
Name(iPECS-LIK):
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
• Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
• Dial the desired number to be stored,
• Press HOLD/SAVE ,
• Enter the associated name, if desired, using the Character
Entry chart,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex
button(iPECS-MG):
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Press the desired Flex button,
• Dial ‘1’ for Number,
• Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
• Dial the desired number,
• Press HOLD/SAVE ,
21
LIP-8004D
User Guide
3.3.4 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name (iPECSMG)
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the
Intercom directory, you must enter a name for your
station (up to 16 characters):
To place a call using Dial by Name:
• Press the SPEED button twice,
• Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2: Public
directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will display the names
in alphabetical order,
• Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys.
• Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 12 (Station User Name code),
• Enter the Name, up to 16 characters,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
22
LIP-8004D
4. Call Handling
User Guide
4. Call Handling
4.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, using Call Transfer. You can
screen the transfer with the receiving party (Screened
Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are placed in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be used to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Call the transfer party,
• Unscreened Call Transfer - Hang-up,
OR
• Screened Call Transfer - When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call and then hang-up.
4.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
To place a call on Hold:
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
23
LIP-8004D
User Guide
4.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
• Press the desired CO/IP line button.
4.4 Joining multiple people in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 24 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF Flex button is required.
To establish a Conference:
• Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
• Press the CONF Flex button,
• Establish call with the other conference party,
• Press the CONF Flex button,
• Press the CONF Flex button again to establish the conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
24
LIP-8004D
User Guide
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
• Press the CONF Flex button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
• Establish conference with two external parties,
• Press the CONF Flex button,
• Hand-up handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the CONF Flex button
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
• Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
• If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
• Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
• Dial the Conference Room Number,
• Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
• Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
• Dial the Conference Room password,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
25
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
• Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
• If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
• Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
• Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
• Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
• Dial the Conference Room password,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
4.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired User of
Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601-619
for iPECS-300 & 600),
• Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601 for
iPECS-300 & 600).
26
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial the Park Orbit (541),
• Dial the Park number (00-49)
• Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Park Orbit (541),
• Dial the Park number (00-49)
27
LIP-8004D
5. Retrieving &
Responding to
Messages
User Guide
5. Retrieving & Responding to Mesages
5.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication when you do not answer or your phone is in
DND. A flashing MSG LED on the iPECS Phone
indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You
may respond with a call back.
To respond to your Station messages:
• Dial 557 to return message.
5.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
Box is part of the integrated Voice Mail module, the
iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and
management of the received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
• Dial 557(iPECS-LIK)/523(iPECS-MG), or
• Press CALL BACK, and Dial 2(iPECS-MG),
• After the prompt enter your station number and password,
• Dial desired option codes,
• At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for
answer by the Auto Attendant,
• Upon answer, dial #(iPECS-LIK)/523(iPECS-MG) to receive the
‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
• Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
• Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
• Dial desired option codes,
• At completion of session, hang-up.
28
LIP-8004D
6. Remote
System Access
User Guide
6. Remote System Access
6.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc).
To access system resources remotely:
• Call the system’s DISA facility,
• Await an answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
• Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
• Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
6.2 Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive calls on a registered mobile phone. Calls to
your iPECS Phone will ring your Mobile Phone and you
can place calls using the resources of the iPECS. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature can be activated through an ISDN CO line.
29
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To register a mobile phone number:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 37.
• Dial the mobile phone number.
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button.
• Dial 38.
• 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check
the Caller ID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom
dial tone,
• Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial * while on an iPECS call,
• Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer by pressing the # key.
30
LIP-8004D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 51,
• Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
• 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 52,
• Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
• Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
• Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
• Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
• Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
31
LIP-8004D
7. Misc.
Features
User Guide
7. Misc. Features
7.1 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
To turn on Background Music:
• Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
7.2 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS 100), 501535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
Internal All Call Page 543
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
32
LIP-8004D
User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the desired Page zone,
• If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK):
• Press the CALL BACK ,
• Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page code).
7.3 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
• Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
• Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
• Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
• Press the * key.
To place a page to the active PTT group:
• Press and hold the PTT Flex button.
• After confirmation tone make page announcement.
33
LIP-8004D
User Guide
7.4 Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm Clock for each station. You
can set the alarm clock to repeat daily or as a one-time
alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/13(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock code).
• Dial hh/mm for time alarm should alert,
• Press # to have the alarm repeat daily,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/14(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock delete code)
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
7.5 Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
• Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial #* (Door Open code) and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS -300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
34
LIP-8004D
User Guide
7.6 Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
7.7 System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos can be heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for
SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
To hear Date & Time memo:
• Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, or *661 for iPECS300 & 600, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
• Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
• Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, or *662 for iPECS-300 &
600, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
• The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
• Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, or *663 for iPECS-300 &
600, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
• Station Status Memo is heard.
35
LIP-8004D
User Guide
7.8 Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
The Phone LCD brightness can be adjusted to your
preference.
To change the Phone LCD Contrast:
• While the phone is idle, press the VOL ▲▼ buttons.
• VOL ▲ will increase darkness.
• VOL ▼ will decrease dark (brightness).
7.9 Network Config.
The user can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. Settings:
• Press TRANS/PGM button and dial ##1(iPECS-LIK)/80(iPECSMG),
• Enter the password (default=147*), the following will display:
• MFIM #1 –
CHANGE[#]
•
•
•
Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
Press the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To set default Config settings:
• In Network Config. Menu, use the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to
locate the Default Config Screen (shown),
Set default – [*]
• Press the * key.
To exit Config. Settings:
• Press the On Hook Dial button,
• Press the * key to exit,
OR
• Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new settings.
36
LIP-8004D
8. PBX,
Centrex &
ISDN
User Guide
8. PBX, Centrex & ISDN
8.1 Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
• Lift the handset,
• Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
• Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
• Momentarily press the Hook-switch,
• After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
8.2 Access the ISDN Network
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial
into the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
• Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
• Dial as desired.
37
LIP-8004D
User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
• Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
• OR
• Press a Feature or Flex button.
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the receiving phone (may be a subscription
service of your carrier). Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the CLIR/COLR button and place the call.
38
LIP-8004D
9. Set Features
& Flex Buttons
User Guide
9. Set Features & Flex Buttons
9.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B.
To assign User Programmable station attributes:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may
even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (e.g., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin
number.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code
(refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Press the desired Flex button,
• Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program
codes, first press the TRANS/PGM ,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
39
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-LIK
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
40
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only;
Toggle
ON/OFF
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620 –
659
66
601619
620 –
667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Remark
only
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line Access
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
41
SLT use
only
620 –
667
*66
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door)
Door Open (2nd Door)
Door Open (3rd Door)
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door)
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
##
*0
##
*0
##
#0
#0
#0
Remark
number
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
& 600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
Name
1
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
42
Remark
LIP-8004D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For
Attendant
Page Auto Answer
545
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
14
15
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call
Page
Xx: Page
Group #
546
548
43
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
LIP-8004D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
44
Remark
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line
#
(001 ~ 200 :
MG-300
01 ~ 80 :
MG-100)
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8004D
No
57
58
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
535
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
61
62
63
64
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
COLR Access
Pilot Hunt Call
Command Call Oneway
582
583
584
585
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Camp On Register
OHVO Register
Mobile Num Register
Mobile CLI Register
Mobile Access
CCR Access
CCR Access And Drop
System Hold
Return Held CO
Sys Memo
DISA Tone Service
All Feature Cancel
590
591
592
593
594
670
671
560
8**
675
678
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
System Alarm Reset
Fault Alarm Reset
Door Open
Keypad Facility
T-Net Log-In/Out
Universal Answer
USB Call Record
565
566
#*1
##*
586
587
588
87
88
89
90
Delete All VM Message
VM Page Message Record
Direct VM Transfer
Loop Key
681
682
683
684
91
Call Log
685
45
Remark
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-LIK
Code
Function
10
Enblock Mode Dialing
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
Remarks
21
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
(X = 1-2 )
Knock Down Station COS
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
32
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Moblie Extension CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Timer
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
14 x
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay
(0~9)
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
53 xx
Create Conference Room
54 xx
Delete Conference Room
71
73
74 x
79
LCD Display Mode
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone Version
46
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
N/A
Input up to 12 characters
LIP-8004D
Code
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9* xx
User Guide
Function
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
Assign PTT Button
{IN-ROOM INDICATION} Button
Assignment
Remarks
Requires Voice Mail
(xx : 01~10)
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
12 +
Name
13 +
Time
14
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
User name creation
2 digit for each character
Set wake-up alarm time
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
47
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Code
Function
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 +
MSG
number
[xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom #
Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm
& Auth
Code
55 + Rm
& Auth
Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
Remarks
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
48
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Appendix C Useful Information : Open Source Software Notice
Open Source Software Notice
This following GPL (General Public License) software used in this product
are subject to the GPL License Agreements.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL licenses from Ericsson-LG Web Site
(http://www.ericssonlg.com).
GPL License:
1. u-boot
2. bash
3. linux
4. busybox
5. Alsa Libraries
6. udhcpc
7. ortp
8. Curl / LibCurl
9. libsrtp
10. Expat xml parser
Ericsson-LG offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge
covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media,
shipping and handling upon e-mail request to Ericsson-LG at. :
[email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the
distribution of this product by Ericsson-LG.
49
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Please read this manual carefully before
operating Phone. Retain it for future reference
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
Date
Remark
1.0
Jan. 2009
Initial Release
1.1
Aug. 2010
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
1.2
Oct. 2012
Changed CI to Ericsson-LG
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions,
use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a
violation of Copyright Laws. Ericsson-LG reserves the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG in
this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in
all cases. iPECS is trademarks of Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All other brand and product
names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only Ericsson-LG approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the phone. If so, call the service center as this
may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or equipment damage.
5. Do not use the phone during a thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result in
fire, severe electrical or acoustic shock.
6. Do not use the power adapter if the power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause electric shock or damage the
equipment and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids such
as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do not clean with wax or silicon
products as these may enter the equipment and cause operation to become
unstable.
LIP-8008D
User Guide
[EU]
European Union Declarations of Conformity
Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. declare that the equipment specified in this document
bearing the “ CE” mark conforms to the European Union Radio and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive(R&TTE 1999/5/EC),
including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive(2004/108/EC) and Low
Voltage Directive(2006/95/EC).
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by
contacting your local sales representative.
[USA/CSA]
FCC/IC Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 /RSS-GEN of the FCC/IC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference; and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely
outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the
Canadian regulations.
CAUTION : Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
LIP-8008D
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................... 1
FEATURE INFORMATION ....................................................................................................................... 1
FEATURE GROUPINGS .......................................................................................................................... 1
IPECS LIP-8008D PHONE DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 2
LIP-8008D PHONE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 3
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Wiring Connectors ......................................................................................... 4
Power ............................................................................................................ 4
Wall Mount ..................................................................................................... 5
1.6 DSS(DIRECT STATION SELECT) CONSOLE INSTALLATION ................................................... 5
1.7 USING A SERIAL DSS.......................................................................................................................... 7
2. RECEIVING CALLS......................................................................................... 10
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
ANSWERING A CALL W HILE IDLE .................................................................................................... 10
RESPONDING TO A CALL W HILE BUSY ......................................................................................... 10
DIFFERENTIAL RING SIGNALS ........................................................................................................... 11
ANSWERING CALLS AT NIGHT ......................................................................................................... 13
ANSWERING CALLS TO OTHER STATIONS .................................................................................. 13
USING DO-NOT-DISTURB (DND) TO BLOCK INCOMING CALLS ......................................... 13
FORWARDING CALLS........................................................................................................................... 14
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail ......................................... 14
Forwarding calls to an external number........................................................ 15
Forwarding callers to a Text Message .......................................................... 17
3. PLACING CALLS ............................................................................................ 21
3.1 INTERNAL CALLS ................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.1
3.1.2
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ................................................ 21
To leave a Message Wait ............................................................................. 22
3.2 EXTERNAL CALLS ................................................................................................................................ 22
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Placing external CO/VoIP calls..................................................................... 22
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ...................................................... 24
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing ........................................ 24
To disable dialing from your phone .............................................................. 25
To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone.................................. 25
3.3 USING AUTOMATED DIALING........................................................................................................... 26
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ................................................................. 26
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ....................................................... 26
Using System Speed Dial Numbers ............................................................. 26
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ......................................... 27
i
LIP-8008D
User Guide
4. CALL HANDLING ........................................................................................... 29
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CALL TRANSFER: SENDING A CALL TO A DIFFERENT DESTINATION .................................. 29
CALL HOLD: PLACING A CALL IN A WAITING STATE ................................................................. 29
BROKER CALL: SWITCHING BETWEEN TWO CALLS ................................................................. 30
JOINING MULTIPLE PEOPLE IN A CONFERENCE ......................................................................... 30
4.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room .................................................................... 31
4.5 CALL PARK: PLACING A CALL ON HOLD TO PAGE .................................................................... 32
5. RETRIEVING & RESPONDING TO MESSAGES ...................................... 34
5.1 RESPONDING TO A STATION MESSAGE W AITING INDICATION ............................................ 34
5.2 GETTING VOICE MAIL MESSAGES ................................................................................................ 34
6. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ........................................................................ 36
6.1 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ............................................................................... 36
6.2 MOBILE PHONE EXTENSION ............................................................................................................ 36
7. MISC. FEATURES .......................................................................................... 39
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
BACKGROUND MUSIC AND MUSIC ON HOLD (IPECS-LIK) ............................................... 39
USING INTERNAL, EXTERNAL AND MEET-ME PAGING .......................................................... 39
PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) PAGE........................................................................................................... 41
WAKE-UP ALARM ................................................................................................................................. 41
ALARM/DOOR BELL ............................................................................................................................ 42
POWER FAIL TRANSFER ................................................................................................................... 42
SYSTEM VOICE MEMO ....................................................................................................................... 42
CONTRAST (IPECS-LIK) ................................................................................................................. 43
NETWORK CONFIG. ............................................................................................................................ 44
8. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN............................................................................ 45
8.1 ACCESS PBX OR CENTREX ............................................................................................................ 45
8.2 ACCESS THE ISDN NETWORK ....................................................................................................... 45
8.2.1
8.2.2
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ....................................... 45
Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction ............................................................. 46
9. SET FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS.......................................................... 47
9.1 ENTERING STATION PROGRAM DATA ...........................................................................................47
9.2 ASSIGNING FEATURES TO FLEX BUTTONS .................................................................................47
9.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................. 48
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ............................................... 50
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ....................................................... 56
APPENDIX C USEFUL INFORMATION : OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE
NOTICE ................................................................................................................ 60
ii
LIP-8008D
1. Introduction
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1 General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced-technology,
highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom system designed
to make office communications easy and productive.
Employing state-of-the-art Voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP) technology, voice and data converge on a single
IP packet network. Because each iPECS Phone is an
IP appliance, it can be moved easily throughout the
office LAN and maintain normal operation.
1.2 Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone, and moves on
to receiving and placing calls, and then to more
advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator and/or iPECS Technical
Manuals as needed).
NOTE—Under certain operation conditions, this
equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency
calls (loss of power, etc.). Alternative arrangements
should be made for access to emergency services.
1.3 Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls,
Placing calls etc. Within each group, features are
arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1
LIP-8008D
User Guide
1.4 iPECS LIP-8008D Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8008D Phone incorporates the latest in
VoIP technology and is intended for basic
communications (ex., a lobby or limited use phone). The
following image shows the LIP-8008D.
LIP-8008D Front and Back
Features are generally accessed using programmed
fixed, or flexible buttons, dial pad buttons, or dial codes
entered from the dial pad. In the remainder of this User
Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown with a
box surrounding the BUTTON designation. The following
image shows the phone with button descriptions.
iPECS LIP-8008D Diagram
2
LIP-8008D
User Guide
DND – Blocks all incoming calls; red LED illuminates.
Speed – Access speed dialing, speed programming.
Vol   – Adjusts volume for ringing, headset, and
speakerphone; adjusts LCD brightness (in idle state).
Trans/PGM –Call transfer, or programming mode.
Hold/Save – Places active call on hold or saves
programming information.
Call Back – Initiates call back request when calling a
busy station; call is completed when busy station returns
to idle status.
Speaker – Allows User to place a call while on-hook.
Toggle to activate; red LED illuminates.
Flexible – Some are system pre-programmed for line
appearance, and some are user programmable.
Ring/MSG Indicator – Illuminates when ringing, or
message waiting.
LCD Display – Phone interface for status, dialing
directories, and text message information.
Soft Buttons – Used with fixed and flexible features;
use changes in relation to LCD display.
Hands-free Microphone – Used for hands-free
speakerphone function.
1.5 LIP-8008D Phone Installation
LIP Phones can be connected to any standard 10/100
Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in graphic). When
connected to an 802.3af compliant switch port (ex.,
POE8), LIP Phones obtain power from the Ethernet port.
When LAN power is available, do not use AC/DC
adaptor. When LAN power is not available, the AC/DC
adaptor must be used. The following image shows how
to connect the handset, power cord, and LAN cable to
the phone.
3
LIP-8008D
User Guide
iPECS LIP-8008D Connections
1.5.1 Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8008D has a two Ethernet ports one is
connected to the LAN using a RJ-45 plug terminated
category 5 cable supplied with the Phone, the other can
be connected to a desktop PC. Using the cable, one
RJ-45 plug is inserted into the "LAN" jack in the bottom
of the Phone. The other RJ-45 plug is inserted into the
RJ-45 jack previously wired to an Ethernet switch port
accessible by the iPECS system. To power the LIP
Phone over the LAN, the switch port must support POE
(Power over Ethernet) standard 802.3af.
1.5.2 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
4
LIP-8008D
User Guide
1.5.3 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions detail how to perform
a wall mount installation:
•
•
•
•
•
1.6
Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and tighten
each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch) of the screw
exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure the
phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and tighten
or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
For the wall-mounting, sleeve of the CAT5 cable should be
moved backward to prevent it protrude.
DSS(Direct Station Select) Console Installation
A DSS console can be installed with the LIP-8000E series
phone as shown in Figure. Up to 3 consoles may be daisy
chained as shown using the flat cable provided. Keep in
mind the following conditions when installing LIP-8000
DSS consoles.
1. The AC/DC adapter must be used for LIP-8048DSS.
2. Up to two (2) LIP-8012LSS and/or LIP-8012DSS can be
installed with LIP-8000E Phone.
3. The LIP-8048DSS must be separately powered.
The available DSS is as follows:
1)
LIP-8012DSS
2)
LIP-8012LSS
3)
LIP-8048DSS
5
LIP-8008D
User Guide
LIP-8000 DSS Installation
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 48DSS)
6
LIP-8008D
User Guide
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 12LSS)
1.7 Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012ESS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS
can be connected with the LIP-8012D or LIP-8024D
using the RS-232 cable. Be sure to verify the serial
DSS and LSS capacities with the iPECS System to
ensure usability (refer to iPECS Manual). The following
graphics show the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a serial
DSS. iPECS SBG-1000 does not support serial DSS.
7
LIP-8008D
User Guide
LIP-8012ESS
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8048DSS
8
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To use a Serial DSS:
• Verify the Station has Serial DSS Usage authority (Admin
PGM111-Flex21),
• Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
• Power-OFF the phone,
• Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
• Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
• Program the DSS button using Web Admin Programming or
PGM115,
• Edit LSS label from Admin PGM129 (default label is provided
from MFIM).
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
• Enter Admin PGM111-Flex21,
• Select Station range to clear Serial DSS Database,
• Dial 0,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To use a Serial DSS:
• Set the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin PGM120Flex2),
• Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
• Power-OFF the phone,
• Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
• Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
• Program the DSS button using Web Admin Programming or
PGM126,
• Edit LSS label from Admin PGM126.
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
• Clear the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin PGM120Flex2),
• Admin PGM120-Felx3 to reset the phone.
9
LIP-8008D
2. Receiving
Calls
User Guide
2. Receiving Calls
2.1 Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external calls, Intercom Voice Announce calls,
and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered by
lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line button or a LOOP button. External calls are
from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed to
ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may
be assigned allowing others to answer the call before
the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc., will Recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in HandsFree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
• Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
• Lift the handset to respond.
2.2 Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tone on top
10
LIP-8008D
User Guide
of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. When used audio is received from both the
active call and the Voice Over announcement.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals by: placing
the existing call on Hold and responding to the new
incoming call, activating One-time DND, sending a
Silent Text Message, or ignoring the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
• Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
• Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
• Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
• Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
• Select the desired message to send.
2.3 Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
th
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5 to
th
8 Ring Tone.
11
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
• Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
• Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
• Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
•
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
• Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
• Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
• Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
• Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
• Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
12
LIP-8008D
User Guide
2.4 Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 567(iPECS-LIK)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
2.5 Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station Private
Line unless the line appears on your phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
• Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
2.6 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb (DND) when you wish not to be
interrupted by pressing the DND button; the phone will
block incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast
busy tone and the display will show the DND status.
Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy (One-Time DND);
DND will be active only for the duration of the present
call, and requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
13
LIP-8008D
User Guide
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
• Press the DND button.
2.7 Forwarding Calls
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls,
when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
14
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or
internal system resource:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button ,
• Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
• Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button ,
• Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button ,
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button,
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Press the # key.
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can
be forwarded from an internal station or a remote
location. You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded internally or externally.
Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer.
15
LIP-8008D
User Guide
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In IPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button,
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Press FWD soft button,
• Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
• Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
• While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code
554,
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
• Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
• Dial Speed Dial bin number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
16
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 554 (Call Forward Register Feature Code),
• Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
• Dial Telephone number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 554 (Call Forward Register Feature Code),
• Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
• Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
• Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
• Dial Telephone number,
• Replace the handset, return to idle.
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to callers. When calling your
Station, Internal callers will automatically receive the
selected message or you can send a text message you
select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you, see Station Speed Dial Character
entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fixed Pre-defined Text
Messages; some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc.
(as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 03:
17
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Message 04:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Message 05:
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
18
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
• Lift the handset,
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 51,
• Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
• Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
• Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 51,
• Dial #.
• Press HOLD/SAVE
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 52,
• Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart,
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
message saved.
19
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 41,
• Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
• Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
• Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
• Press the Fwd Soft button,
• Press FWD button or dial 554,
• Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial User Program feature code 42,
• Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
@
:
/
@
:
/
2
3
A
D
B
E
C
F
a
d
b
e
c
f
2
3
4
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
5
6
J
M
K
N
L
O
j
m
k
n
l
o
5
6
7
8
P
T
Q
U
R
V
S
p
t
q
u
r
v
s
7
8
9
0
W
.
X
,
Y
?
Z
!
w
.
x
,
y
?
z
!
9
0
*
#
*
#
Press
*
#
Character Entry Chart
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
20
<
1
1
•
<
Num
1
*
#
LIP-8008D
3. Placing
Calls
User Guide
3. Placing Calls
3.1 Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with a single
tuch of the button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
• When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, speak
to the called party.
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
21
LIP-8008D
User Guide
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing just the last digit of the Intercom
number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
• While placing a call to a busy station, dial * and wait for an
answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
• While placing a call to a busy station, press the
button and hang-up.
CALL BACK
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
• Dial #, and after the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the MSG LED will
flash.
To activate Message Waiting:
• Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
3.2 External Calls
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
88 + Line number (01-10 for iPECS SBG-1000, 01-42
for iPECS-50 & 100, 001-200 for iPECS-300, 001400 for iPECS-600, or 001-600 for iPECS-1200).
22
LIP-8008D
User Guide
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access
801-805 for iPECS SBG-1000, 801-820 for iPECS- 50 &
100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600, or 8900`-89100
for iPECS-1200
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing for banking
services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency numbers
(ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station in the System,
regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
23
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To place an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
• Dial the desired number.
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
• Select/dial a busy CO/IP line,
• Press the CALL BACK button,
• Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
becomes available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. When an
Account Code is entered, it is output from the system
to a printer in the SMDR report. An Account Code Flex
button can be programmed (refer to Assigning features
to Flex buttons).
In iPECS-LIK
To enter an Account Code before the call:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
• Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
• Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
• Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
• Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
• Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
• Press *.
24
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To enter an Account Code before the call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 550,
• Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
• Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
• Place the CO/IP call as normal.
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable dialing outside calls
from the phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you
must enter the Station’s Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization code,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
• Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
• Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
• Place call as normal.
25
LIP-8008D
User Guide
3.3 Using Automated Dialing
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial *,
• Press the Vol Up/Vol Down to select the desired number,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial *.
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Saved Number Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED .
• Dial #
To store a number in the Saved Number Dial:
• While on an outgoing external call, press SPEED twice.
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100 systems each have
memory allocated for 800 System Speed Dial numbers
(bins 200-999). The iPECS-300 system has memory
allocated for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
26
LIP-8008D
User Guide
2000-4999). The iPECS-600 system has memory
allocated for 6000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-7999). The iPECS-1200 system has memory
allocated for 12000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
20000-31999). The iPECS-MG100 system has memory
allocated for 1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-2999). The iPECS-MG300 system has memory
allocated for 2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for
iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-300,
2000-7999 for iPECS-600, 20000-31999 for iPECS-12000,
2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 , or 2000-3999 for iPECS3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100
System is allocated memory for 20 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 23 digits. The iPECS300 & 600 & 1200 each support 100 Station Speed
Dial numbers (bins 000-099). The iPECS-MG 100 &
300 each support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins
000-049). These numbers are entered at the user’s
station and may include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1
digit—Send digits as ISDN
Keypad Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
27
LIP-8008D
User Guide
st
‘*’ not as 1 digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
• Lift the handset,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Press SPEED ,
• Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
• Select/dial the CO/IP line/group, (Skip this step in iPECS SBG1000)
• Dial the desired number to be stored,
• Press HOLD/SAVE ,
• Enter the associated name, if desired,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
28
LIP-8008D
4. Call
Handling
User Guide
4. Call Handling
4.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, using Call Transfer. You can
screen the transfer with the receiving party (Screened
Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are placed in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be used to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Call the transfer party,
• Unscreened Call Transfer - Hang-up,
OR
• Screened Call Transfer - When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call and then hang-up.
4.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
To place a call on Hold:
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
29
LIP-8008D
User Guide
4.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
• Press the desired CO/IP line button.
4.4 Joining multiple people in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 32 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF button is required.
To establish a Conference:
• Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
• Press CONF .
• Establish call with the other conference party,
• Press CONF .
• Repeat to add additional parties to the conference
• Press CONF .
To place a Conference on Hold:
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
30
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
• Press the CONF button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
• Establish conference with two external parties,
• Press the CONF button.
• Hand-up handset.
•
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the CONF button
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 32
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
• Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
• If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
• Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
• Dial the Conference Room Number,
• Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
• Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
• Dial the Conference Room password,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
31
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
• Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
• If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
• Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
• Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
• Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
• Dial the Conference Room password,
• Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
4.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired User of
Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS SBG-1000 &
Micro & 50 & 100, 601-619 for iPECS-300 & 600 or 601-800 for
iPECS-1200),
• Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS SBG-1000 &
Micro & 50 & 100, 601-619 for iPECS-300 & 600 or 601-800
for iPECS-1200).
32
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial the Park Orbit (541),
• Dial the Park number (00-49)
• Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the Park Orbit (541),
• Dial the Park number (00-49)
33
LIP-8008D
5. Retrieving
& Responding
to Messages
User Guide
5. Retrieving & Responding to Messages
5.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication when you do not answer or your phone is in
DND. A flashing CALL BACK LED on the iPECS Phone
indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You
may respond with a call back.
To respond to your Station messages:
• Press CALL BACK to return message.
5.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
Box is part of the integrated Voice Mail module, the
iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and
management of the received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station to Voice Mail. You will
need to register an Authorization Code for your station
to access VMIM/VSF Voice messages.
34
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
• Press CALL BACK ,
• After the prompt enter your station number and password,
• Dial desired option codes,
• At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for
answer by the Auto Attendant,
• Upon answer,
• dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt(iPECS-LIK
& SBG)
• Or
• dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),
• Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
• Dial desired option codes,
• At completion of session, hang-up.
35
LIP-8008D
6. Remote
System
Access
User Guide
6. Remote System Access
6.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc). The iPECS SBG-1000 system does
not support normal DISA service, but supports call to
the station and remote voice mail access when
answering by a VSF auto attendant.
In iPECS SBG-1000
To call to the station remotely:
• Call the telephone number of a CO line assigned for answer by
a VSF auto attendant,
• Upon answer, dial station number.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS-MG
To access system resources remotely:
• Call the system’s DISA facility,
• Await an answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
• Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
• Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
6.2 Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive calls on a registered mobile phone. Calls to
your iPECS Phone will ring your Mobile Phone and you
can place calls using the resources of the iPECS. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is activated through an ISDN/VOIP CO line.
36
LIP-8008D
User Guide
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by
pressing the # key.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To register a mobile phone number: (iPECS-LIK)
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 37.
• Dial the mobile phone number.
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone: (iPECS-LIK)
• Press the TRANS/PGM button.
• Dial 38.
• 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check
the Caller ID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom
dial tone,
• Place internal or external iPECS calls as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial * while on an iPECS call,
• Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
37
LIP-8008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 51,
• Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
• 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
• Press the TRANS/PGM button,
• Dial 52,
• Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
• Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
• Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
• Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
• Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
• Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer call by
pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
38
LIP-8008D
7. Misc.
Features
User Guide
7. Misc. Features
7.1 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are eleven possible selections for BGM and
MOH:
00: Off
01: Source BGM1
02: Source BGM2
03: VSF MOH 1
04: SLT MOH 1
05: SLT MOH 2
06: SLT MOH 3
07: SLT MOH 4
08: SLT MOH 5
09: VSF MOH 2
10: VSF MOH 3
To turn on Background Music:
• Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
7.2 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS SBG-1000
& 50 & 100), 501-535 (iPECS-300 & 600), 301-400
(iPECS-1200)
Internal All Call Page 543
39
LIP-8008D
User Guide
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial the desired Page zone,
• If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK & SBG):
• Press CALL BACK ,
• Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/511(iPECS SBG-1000)/546(iPECS-MG)
(Meet-Me-Page code).
40
LIP-8008D
User Guide
7.3 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
• Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
• Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
• Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
• Press the * key.
To place a page to the active PTT group:
• Press and hold the PTT button.
• After confirmation tone make page announcement.
7.4 Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm Clock for each station. You
can set the alarm clock to repeat daily or as a one-time
alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM or Wake-Up Alarm announcement (iPECS-LIK,
iPECS SBG-1000) will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/21(iPECS SBG-1000)/13(iPECS-MG)
(Alarm Clock code).
• Dial hh/mm for time alarm should alert,
• Press # to have the alarm repeat daily,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/ 22(iPECS SBG-1000)/14(iPECS-MG)
(Alarm Clock delete code)
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
41
LIP-8008D
User Guide
7.5 Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
• Dial 565(iPECS-LIK & MG)/65(iPECS SBG-1000) (Alarm Stop
code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
• Lift the handset,
• Dial #* (Door Open code) and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS -300 & 600.
Contacts 1 is available in the iPECS -MG.
7.6 Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
7.7 System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos can be heard over the
speaker or handset of the iPECS Phone and over the
handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
42
LIP-8008D
User Guide
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
To hear Date & Time memo:
• Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
• Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
• Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *662 for iPECS300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
• The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
• Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *663 for iPECS300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
• Station Status Memo is heard.
7.8 Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
The Phone LCD brightness can be adjusted to your
preference.
To change the Phone LCD Contrast:
• While the phone is idle, press the VOL ▲▼ buttons.
• VOL ▲ will increase darkness.
• VOL ▼ will decrease dark (brightness).
43
LIP-8008D
User Guide
7.9 Network Config.
The user can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. Settings:
• Press TRANS/PGM button and Dial 78(iPECS-LIK)/38(iPECS
SBG-1000)/80(iPECS-MG),
• Enter the password (default=147*), the following will display:
• MFIM #[1/2] ?
• MFIM #1 –
CHANGE[#]
• Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
• Press the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
• Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To set default Config settings:
• In Network Config. Menu, use the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to
locate the Default Config Screen (shown),
Set default – [*]
• Press the * key.
To exit Config. Settings:
• Press SPEAKER ,
• Press the * key to exit,
OR
• Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new settings.
44
LIP-8008D
8. PBX,
Centrex &
ISDN
User Guide
8. PBX, Centrex & ISDN
8.1 Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
• Lift the handset,
• Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
• Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
• Press the FLASH button
• After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
8.2 Access the ISDN Network
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial
into the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
• Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
• Dial as desired.
45
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
• Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
• OR
• Press a Feature or Flex button.
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the receiving phone (may be a subscription
service of your carrier). Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate incoming, Connected Line (COL),
and outgoing, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
• Lift the handset,
• Press the CLIR/COLR button and place the call.
46
LIP-8008D
9. Set
Features &
Flex Buttons
User Guide
9. Set Features & Flex Buttons
9.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B.
To assign User Programmable station attributes:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may
even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (e.g., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin
number.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan
code (refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
• Press TRANS/PGM ,
• Press the desired Flex button,
• Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program
codes, first press the TRANS/PGM ,
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
47
LIP-8008D
User Guide
9.3 Network configuration
You many review the current network configuration or
modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network settings:
• Press TRANS/PGM button and dial 78(iPECS-LIK)/38(iPECS
SBG-1000)/80(iPECS-MG),
• Enter the password (default=147*); the following will display:
• MFIM #[1/2] ?
• MFIM #1 - CHANGE[#]
•
•
•
Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
Press the VOL ▲▼ buttons to advance to the next network
configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
48
LIP-8008D
User Guide
To set LLDP:
• In Network Config. Menu, use VOL ▲▼ buttons to locate the
802.1x configuration screen (shown),
• LLDP?
• [ENABLED] – CHANGE [#]
•
Enable in LLDP? menu and press the Hold/Save button.
To configure 802.1x:
• In Network Config. Menu, use VOL ▲▼ buttons to locate the
802.1x configuration screen (shown),
• 802.1x ?
• [ENABLED] –
CHANGE[#]
•
•
•
•
Enable in 802.1x menu and press the Hold/Save button.
Enter ID in 802.1x USER ID menu (It appears when 802.1x is
enabled.) and press the Hold/Save button.
Enter Password in 802.1x PASSWORD menu (It appears when
802.1x is enabled.) and press the Hold/Save button.
To set default Config. settings:
• In Network Config. Menu, use VOL ▲▼ buttons to locate the
Default Config. Screen (shown),
• SET DEFAULT
CONFIG(DOT:*)
•
•
•
Press the * key.
To exit Config. settings:
• Press the SPEAKER button,
• Press the * key to exit,
OR
• Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new setting.
49
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
Feature
iPECS
-50
iPECS
-100
iPECS
-300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
iPECS
SBG1000
Intercom Call
100 149
801 –
820
100 169
801 820
100 399
801 872
1000 1599
801 872
10-33
Individual CO/IP Line
Access
8801 –
8842
8801 –
8842
Group Pilot Number
620 –
659
501 510
601 –
610
66
620 659
501 510
601610
66
88001
–
88200
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
88001
–
88400
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
1000 2199
89001
89200
88001
–
88600
401 500
301 400
601 800
*66
#*1
#*1 #*2
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
#*
CO/IP Group Access
Internal Page Zone
Call Parking Locations
Station User
VMIM/VSF Features
Door Open
Feature
iPECS-LIK
iPECS SBG1000
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
Last Number Redial
DND
543
544
545 - 546
548
549
550
551
552
553
52
53
Call Forward
554
54
801 805
8801 –
8810
620 –
631
501510
601 –
610
Remark
511
500
50
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only;
Toggle ON/OFF
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS-LIK
iPECS SBG1000
Remark
Speed Dial Programming
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
Cancel DND/FWD
CO System Hold
Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off
Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue
Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held
CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
555
556
55
56
SLT use only
SLT use only
557
57
SLT use only
558
559
560
561
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
58
59
67
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only
65
**
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
59
600
67
7
8*
8#
66
*#
7
8*
8#
9
9
51
SLT use only
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS-LIK
iPECS SBG1000
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
0
*8
*9
*0
##
0
Remark
#0
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Code
Name
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
13
Personal VM Page
Announcement Page For
544
545
52
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group
#
LIP-8008D
No
14
15
User Guide
Feature Name
Attendant
Page Auto Answer
Code
546
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
18
Internal-External Page All
Call Forward Register
549
554
19
514
21
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Register
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Cancel
DND Status Change
22
23
24
25
26
DND Delete
Account Code
CO Flash
Last Number Redial
Station Speed PGM
517
550
551
552
553
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Speed Dial
MWI Register
MWI Answer
MWI Cancel
Call Back Register
Call Back Cancel
Group Call Pickup
Direct Call Pickup
Walking COS
Call Parking Location
555
557
558
559
518
519
564
7
520
541
37
38
PGM Mode Access
Two-Way Record
521
522
39
40
41
VMIB Access
AME Access
CO Line Access
523
524
88
20
Remark
548
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
515
516
53
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 :
MG-300
LIP-8008D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
01 ~ 80 : MG100)
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
48
49
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
Name Register
Create Conf Room
525
526
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Wake Up Register
Wake Up Cancel
Temporarily COS Down
Cancel Temp COS Down
Password Change
Inter-Phone Group Access
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
59
60
61
Forced Handsfree Call
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
537
582
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
54
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8008D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
55
Remark
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-LIK
Code
10
11 x
12 x
Function
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
15 x
19
21
22
23
30
31
32
52 xx
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
Station Ring Download
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
Restore Station COS
Walking COS
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL W AIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
74 x
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
Remarks
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring delay (0-9)
Select download Ring Tone 0-9
May require Authorization code
May require Authorization code
Station number +up to 12 digits,
no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) & optional
password
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3:
both
56
Input up to 12 characters
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Code
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
91
94
95
96
97
98
Function
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Network Configuration
Display Phone Version
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
CONF Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
{IN-ROOM INDICATION} Button
Assignment
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
9* xx
*0
**
*7
Remarks
Requires VSF/External SMDI VM
(xx : 01~10)
In iPECS SBG-1000
Code
Function
Remarks
11
Intercom Answer Mode
12
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
13
Select Headset Ring Type
21
22
31
32
33
34
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
LCD Display Language
SBG Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
0:Headset, 1:Speaker
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3:
both
Input time, 24 hour clock
57
Input up to 12 characters
LIP-8008D
Code
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
4*
50
51
52
53
53
User Guide
Function
Display Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Display Phone Version
Network Configuration
Forced FWD to Destination
Call Log Display
CLIR Service
COLR Service
Assign LOOP Button
Assign CALL BACK Button
Assign CONF Button
Assign MUTE Button
Assign ICM Button
Assign REDIAL Button
Remarks
May require Authorization code
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
SMS Message Protect
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
58
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
LIP-8008D
Code
41 + MSG
number [xx]
User Guide
Function
Remarks
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
43
Create a Station User
Message
Send SMS Message
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
Register the mobile CLI
number
X=1-2
42
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
X=1-2
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
59
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Appendix C Useful Information : Open Source Software
Notice
Open Source Software Notice
This following GPL (General Public License) software used in this product
are subject to the GPL License Agreements.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL licenses from Ericsson-LG Web Site
(http://www.ericssonlg.com).
GPL License:
4. u-boot
5. bash
6. linux
7. busybox
8. Alsa Libraries
9. udhcpc
10. ortp
11. Curl / LibCurl
12. libsrtp
13. Expat xml parser
Ericsson-LG offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge
covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media,
shipping and handling upon e-mail request to Ericsson-LG at. :
[email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the
distribution of this product by Ericsson-LG.
60
LIP-8012D/8024D
User Guide
Please read this manual carefully before
operating Phone. Retain it for future reference
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
1.2
Date
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Oct. 2012
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Changed CI to Ericsson-LG
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions,
use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a
violation of Copyright Laws. Ericsson-LG reserves the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG in
this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in
all cases. iPECS is trademarks of Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All other brand and product
names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
LIP-8012D & 8024D
User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only Ericsson-LG approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Only trained and qualified service personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
Do not spill liquid life water on the phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
If you see smoke or smell something during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center immediately.
If the power adapter is used, do not touch the plug with wet hands. This
may result in a fire or an electric shock or equipment damage.
Do not use the phone during a thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result in
fire, severe electrical or acoustic shock.
Do not use the power adapter if the power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric shock.
Ensure that children do not pull on phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause electric shock or damage the
equipment and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids such
as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do not clean with wax or silicon
products as these may enter the equipment and cause operation to become
unstable.
LIP-8012D & 8024D
User Guide
[EU]
European Union Declarations of Conformity
Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. declare that the equipment specified in this document
bearing the “ CE” mark conforms to the European Union Radio and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive(R&TTE 1999/5/EC),
including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive(2004/108/EC) and Low
Voltage Directive(2006/95/EC).
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by
contacting your local sales representative.
[USA/CSA]
FCC/IC Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 /RSS-GEN of the FCC/IC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference; and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely
outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the
Canadian regulations.
CAUTION : Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which
are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
General ......................................................................................................... 1
Feature Information ...................................................................................... 1
Feature Groupings........................................................................................ 1
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Description ............................................ 2
LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Installation ........................................................ 3
1.5.1 Phone Connections ........................................................................... 3
1.5.2 Wiring Connectors ............................................................................. 4
1.5.3 Power ................................................................................................ 4
1.5.4 Wall Mount ........................................................................................ 5
1.6 DSS(Direct Station Select) Console Installation ........................................... 5
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ............................................. 8
2.1 Using the Display Menu ................................................................................ 8
2.1.1 Phone Setting .................................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Conference Room (iPECS-LIK) ....................................................... 10
2.1.3 ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK) .................................................................... 11
2.1.4 Network Config................................................................................ 12
2.1.5 Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000) .......................... 14
2.2 Using the Speakerphone ............................................................................ 15
2.3 Using a Serial DSS ..................................................................................... 16
3. RECEIVING CALLS ..................................................................................... 18
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Answering a Call While Idle ........................................................................ 18
Responding to a Call While Busy ............................................................... 19
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) .............................................. 19
Differential Ring Signals ............................................................................. 21
Answering Calls at Night ............................................................................ 22
Answering Calls to Other Stations .............................................................. 22
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls ................................ 22
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................... 23
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail ........................... 23
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number .......................................... 24
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message............................................. 26
4. PLACING A CALL ....................................................................................... 30
4.1 Internal Calls............................................................................................... 30
4.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ................................... 30
4.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait ................................................................. 31
4.2 External Calls ............................................................................................. 31
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls ....................................................... 31
i
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ......................................... 33
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing........................... 33
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ...................................................... 34
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ........................ 34
4.3 Using Directory ........................................................................................... 35
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) .................................................... 35
4.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial .......................................... 35
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers ................................................ 36
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ............................ 37
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name ................................ 38
4.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR) ............................. 40
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING ................................. 41
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ............................... 41
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state .................................................. 41
Broker Call: Switching between two calls ................................................... 42
Joining Multiple People in a Conference .................................................... 42
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room ....................................................... 43
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page ................................................... 45
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call ............................................................ 45
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES................................................................... 46
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication................................. 46
6.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages ..................................................................... 47
6.3 Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ............................................ 48
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ......................................................................... 51
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ......................................................... 51
7.2 Mobile Phone Extension ............................................................................. 51
8. MISC. FEATURES....................................................................................... 54
8.1 Call Log ...................................................................................................... 54
8.2 Contrast (iPECS-LIK) ................................................................................. 56
8.3 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK) ................................... 56
8.4 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ............................................ 57
8.5 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page .......................................................................... 58
8.6 Wake-Up Alarm .......................................................................................... 58
8.7 Alarm/Door Bell .......................................................................................... 59
8.8 Power Fail Transfer (PFT) .......................................................................... 59
8.9 System Voice Memo................................................................................... 59
8.10 Hot Desk ..................................................................................................... 60
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ........................................................... 62
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex features ................................................................ 62
9.2 Access the ISDN Network .......................................................................... 62
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ......................... 62
ii
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services .............................................. 63
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction .............................................. 63
10. FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ..................................................................... 64
10.1 Entering Station Program Data ................................................................... 64
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ............................................................ 64
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ....................................................... 65
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES.............................................................. 71
APPENDIX C USEFUL INFORMATION : OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE ......... 75
iii
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone Speakerphone,
moves on to receiving and placing calls, and then to
more advanced features. Each section includes a brief
and basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System.
Under certain operating conditions, this equipment may
not be able to make emergency calls. Alternative
arrangements should be made for access to emergency
services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving
Calls, Placing Calls etc. Within each group, features
are arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
1.4
User Guide
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8012D and LIP-8024D Phones (shown)
incorporate the latest in VoIP technology and user
interface to provide you with a cost effective, simple to
use, productive communications tool. It includes a large
3-line (LIP-8012D) or 4-line (LIP-8024D) 24-character
per line LCD (refer to Phone Diagrams, next page). The
bottom line of the display is an interactive menu
accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just below the display.
The Navigation button in the lower center of the Phone
allows you to move through the menu choices when
more than three selections are available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed
either using the Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting
a menu item using the Soft buttons. In the remainder of
this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown
with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double
underline.
The LCD display screens shown in this User Guide are
captured from the LIP-8024D. The screen may differ
slightly in the LIP-8012D.
LIP-8012D
LIP-8024D
2
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
LIP-8024D Phone Diagram
1.5
LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Installation
LIP Phones and Consoles can be connected to any
standard 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in
graphic). When connected to an 802.3af compliant
switch port (ex., POE8), LIP Phones and series
consoles can derive power from the Ethernet port.
When LAN power is not available, the optional AC/DC
adaptor must be used. The following image shows how
to connect the handset, power cord, and LAN cable to
the phone.
1.5.1
Phone Connections
The LIP-8012D and LIP-8024D each have 2 RJ-45 and
10/100 Base-T LAN connection ports (refer to following
graphic). One port is for connecting to the LAN (‘D’ in
graphic), and the other can be connected to a desktop
data device such as a PC (‘B’ in graphic), or another
LAN interface terminal (refer to iPECS Hardware and
Installation Manual).
3
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Connections
1.5.2
Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D each have two (2) 10/100
Base-T Ethernet ports, a “LAN” port and a “PC” port.
An intelligent switch, which implements voice packet
priority, connects the two (2) ports. This permits the
LAN to be shared between the LIP Phone and the
desktop PC or other Ethernet terminal without
significant affect on the voice or data traffic. The “LAN”
port is connected to the LAN as described above for the
single port Phones. The “PC” port is connected to a
desktop device using any standard straight through
category 5 cable.
1.5.3
Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
NOTE—LIP-8000 series consoles are powered through
the flat cable used to connect the console to the IP
4
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
phone (shown). Up to 2(without LIP-8048DSS) or 4(with
LIP-8048DSS) consoles can be chain-link connected to
the phone.
1.5.4
Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions describe how to
perform a wall mount installation. For more information
on installing your LIP-8000 series phone, refer to the
iPECS Hardware Description and Installation
Manual.
•
•
•
•
1.6
Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and tighten
the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch) of the screw
exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure the
phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and tighten
or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
DSS(Direct Station Select) Console Installation
A DSS console can be installed with the LIP-8000E series
phone as shown in Figure. Up to 3 consoles may be daisy
chained as shown using the flat cable provided. Keep in
mind the following conditions when installing LIP-8000
DSS consoles.
1. The AC/DC adapter must be used for LIP-8048DSS.
2. Up to two (2) LIP-8012LSS and/or LIP-8012DSS can be
installed with LIP-8000E Phone.
3. The LIP-8048DSS must be separately powered.
The available DSS is as follows:
1)
LIP-8012DSS
2)
LIP-8012LSS
3)
LIP-8048DSS
5
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
LIP-8000 DSS Installation
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 48DSS)
6
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 12LSS)
7
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2. LCD,
Speakerphone
& Related
Featrues
User Guide
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES
2.1 Using the Display Menu
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the iPECS LIP8012D has three lines, and the LIP-8024D has four lines
of 24 characters each. The LCD is used to convey
information to you. It provides the date, time and station
number on the display while idle. It will also provide
called/calling name/number display, feature status and
an interactive menu to guide you through feature access
and User Program selections:
In iPECS-LIK
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. CONFERENCE ROOM PGM
3. ICM SMS
BACK
OK
4. NETWORK CONFIG
0. ATTENDANT
•
BACK
OK
In iPECS SBG-1000
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
OK
8
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
2.1.1
OK
EXIT
Phone Setting
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
To configure the Phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 1 (Phone Setting),
The following menu displays:
1. STATION NAME PROGRAM
2. ICM RING
3. CO RING
BACK
OK
4. PASSWORD PROGRAM
5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM
6. STA RING DOWNLOAD
• BACK
OK
7. BACKLIGHT
8. FONT PROGRAM
BACK
OK
Station Name Program—Input up to 12 digits using the keypad
(press DND button to backspace/delete a character), then press the
OK Soft button. To input characters:
Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or abc> mode,
To input the first character of a button, press the button 1 time (ex., for
‘a’, press 2 button once),
To input the second character of a button, press the button 2 times
(ex., for ‘b’, press the 2 button twice.
To input the third character of a button, press the button 3 times (ex.,
for ‘f’, press the 3 button three times.
9
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Guide
ICM Ring/CO Ring—Use Next Soft button to move through list of ring
types, and press OK Soft button to select.
Password Program—Enter the current password and press the OK
Soft button, then enter the new password and press the OK Soft
button.
Language Program—Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight
available languages supported, and press OK Soft button to select.
Station Ring Download—Select the ring position (5-8) and select the
ring file; press the SAVE Soft button to select.
Backlight—Use Navigation up/down buttons to select the operation of
the backlight, and press the OK Soft button to select.
Font Program— Use Navigation up/down buttons to select the LCD
Font, and press the OK Soft button to select.
In iPECS-MG
• Set Font Type—Select the font type(0 for new roman, 1 for
gothic), and press the OK Soft button to select.
• Set Contrast—Press the VOL   buttons or Use Navigation
up/down buttons to adjust the brightness, then press the OK Soft
button to select.
2.1.2
Conference Room (iPECS-LIK)
The User can create and delete Conference rooms.
To configure a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 2 (Conference Room),
The following menu displays:
1. CREATE CONF ROOM
2. DELETE CONF ROOM
•
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and then press
the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection,
Enter the room number and dial the password,
Press the OK Soft button.
10
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2.1.3
User Guide
ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK)
The user can send SMS messages to other stations and
retrieve received SMS messages.
To retrieve a SMS message:
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and then press
the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection (2); the messages
will display.
To send a SMS message:
•
•
•
•
Select Mode - select 1 if resending a previous message, or
select 2 if sending a new message,
Enter the Station range (ex., 100-105=100105),
Enter message (if in mode 2),
Press the OK Soft button.
11
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2.1.4
User Guide
Network Config.
The User can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 4(iPECS-LIK)/2(iPECS SBG-1000,
iPECS-MG),
Enter the password (default=147*); the following will display:
MFIM #[1/2] ?
MFIM #1 - CHANGE[#]
Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
Press the VOL   buttons to advance to the next network
configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To configure 802.1x:
•
In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the
802.1x configuration screen (shown),
802.1x ?
[ENABLED] – CHANGE[#]
•
•
Enable in 802.1x menu and press the Hold button.
Enter ID in 802.1x USER ID menu (It appears when 802.1x is
enabled.) and press the Hold button.
Enter Password in 802.1x PASSWORD menu (It appears when
802.1x is enabled.) and press the Hold button.
•
To set LLDP:
•
In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the
LLDP configuration screen (shown),
• LLDP?
• [ENABLED] – CHANGE [#]
•
Enable in LLDP? menu and press the Hold/Save button.
12
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To configure VPN:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the
DNS Address menu.
Enter DNS address in DNS ADDRESS menu
Use VOL   buttons to locate the VPN configuration screen
(shown),
VPN ?
[ENABLED] – CHANGE[#]
Enable in VPN Menu and press the Hold button.
Following steps are available when VPN is enabled.
Enter VPN Server address in VPN SERVER IP menu and
press the Hold button.
Enter TCP/UDP port number for both local and remote in VPN
PORT and press the Hold button. The default value is 1194.
In VPN USER ID, enter ID and press the Hold button.
In VPN USER PASSWORD, enter Password and press the
Hold button.
To set default Config. settings:
•
•
In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the
Default Config. Screen (shown),
SET DEFAULT CONFIG(DOT:*)
•
Press the * key.
To exit Config. settings:
•
•
•
Press the SPEAKER button,
Press the * key to exit,
OR
Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new setting.
13
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2.1.5
User Guide
Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000)
The Attendant menu is only available on the System
Attendant phone.
In iPECS-LIK
To access the Attendant menu:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 0 (Attendant); the following will display:
1. DATE/TIME SET
2. SET ICM ONLY MODE
3. RESTORE COS
BACK
OK
4. MONITOR CONF ROOM
5. DELETE CONF ROOM
BACK
OK
Date/Time Set—Enter mm/dd/yy, and press OK Soft button;
enter hh/mm, and press OK Soft button.
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM only calls
(ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS restoring (ex.,
103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
Monitor Conference Room—Enter the Conference Room
number to view the number of attendees in the Conference
Room.
Delete Conference Room—Enter the Conference Room
number and press the OK Soft button to delete.
In iPECS SBG-1000
To access the Attendant menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button and 0 (Attendant); the following will display:
1. SET ICM ONLY MODE
2. RESTORE COS
BACK
OK
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM only calls
(ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS restoring (ex.,
103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
14
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2.2
User Guide
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except
forPaging) in place of lifting the handset to receive or
place calls.
Additionally, you may switch between the handset and
Speakerphone during a call. By keeping the handset
Off-hook, the Group Listen feature is activated, which
provides incoming audio over the speaker with outgoing
audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to
listen to both sides of the conversation without
interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute
the microphone using the MUTE button. When Mute is
active, the MUTE button LED will be illuminated. To turn
off Mute, press the MUTE button again..
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a
feature by pressing its button will activate the
Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the
ON/OFF-hook state for the phone.
To use the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
•
Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook and sends audio to
the speaker and the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
•
Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button.
To Mute the microphone:
•
Select the MUTE button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):
•
Press the MUTE button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:
•
Press the
SPEAKER
button.
15
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
2.3
User Guide
Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012DSS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS
can be connected with the LIP-8012D or LIP-8024D
using the RS-232 cable. Be sure to verify the serial
DSS and LSS capacities with the iPECS System to
ensure usability (refer to iPECS Manual). The following
graphics show the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a serial
DSS. iPECS SBG-1000 does not support serial DSS.
LIP-8012DSS
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8048DSS
16
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To use a Serial DSS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verify the Station has Serial DSS Usage authority (Admin
PGM111-Flex21),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin Programming or
PGM115,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM129 (default label is provided
from MFIM).
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
•
•
•
•
Enter Admin PGM111-Flex21,
Select Station range to clear Serial DSS Database,
Dial 0,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To use a Serial DSS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin PGM120Flex2),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin Programming or
PGM126,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM126.
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
•
•
Clear the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin PGM120Flex2),
Admin PGM120-Felx3 to reset the phone.
17
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
3. Receiving
Calls
3. RECEIVING CALLS
3.1 Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line Preference;
in this case, calls that ring are answered by lifting the
handset. Otherwise, you must press the flashing Flex
button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line or a LOOP button.
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that
are programmed to ring at your phone. For external
calls, Delay Ring may be assigned allowing others to
answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc. will recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in Handsfree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available,
the name of the station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name
Display.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
•
Lift the handset or press the flashing Flex button (as needed),
the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
•
•
•
In HF mode, simply speak as normal into the microphone,
OR
In PV mode, lift the handset to respond.
18
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
3.2
User Guide
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. In this case, audio is received from both
the active call and the Voice Over announcement at the
same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of
several ways; place the existing call on Hold and
respond to the new incoming call, activate One-time
DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new
call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
•
•
Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:
•
Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
•
•
3.3
Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
Select the desired message to send.
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can
screen the call as with a normal Answering Machine.
The caller’s voice is played over your speaker while the
message is being recorded. There are two methods of
notification and call screening provided, LED blink mode
or Speaker hearing mode.
Ring Mode (iPECS-LIK & SBG)/LED Blink Mode
(iPECS-MG)—the Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
Flex button will flash to notify you of a call. You may
press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice
message is stored.
19
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Speaker Mode (iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Speaker Hearing
Mode (iPECS-MG)—when the call is sent to the voice
mailbox, the caller’s voice is automatically broadcast
over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice
mail to record a message, talk with the caller and record
the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and
disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is only
available when using the iPECS VMIB Voice Mail; a
MUTE and AME button should be programmed (refer to
Appendix A User Program Codes).
To screen a call in Ring mode (iPECS-LIK & SBG)/LED blink
mode (iPECS-MG):
•
Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over
the station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the Speaker
hearing mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
•
Press the illuminated
SPEAKER
button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice
Mail:
•
Press the
MUTE
button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
•
Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and the
Voice Mail disconnected.
20
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
3.4
User Guide
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
th
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5 to
th
8 Ring Tone.
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
21
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
3.5
User Guide
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
•
•
3.6
Lift the handset,
Dial 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the call will be
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
•
•
3.7
Lift the handset,
Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb when you wish to not be
interrupted; the phone will block incoming calls. Internal
callers will receive a fast busy tone and the display will
show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while
ringing(One-Time DND); Ringing terminates and the
caller will get a fast busy tone and it requires a DND
button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
22
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
•
3.8
Press the DND button.
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1
Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except
recalls, when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
23
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another
phone or internal system resource:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different
phone within the System (Call Forward, Remote):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
Press the # key.
3.8.2
Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be
forwarded from an internal station or a remote location.
You may define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as
listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
24
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone within the
System:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a remote location:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
While receiving dial-tone, dial 554 (Call Forward feature code),
Dial your Authorization Code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (6-9),
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
25
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3
Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to internal callers. When calling
your Station, internal callers will automatically receive
the selected message or you can send a text message
you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to
24 characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant
and one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text Messages;
some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown
in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 03:
Message 04:
Message 05:
26
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
27
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 51,
Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
•
•
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 52,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
•
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
28
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 41,
Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
•
•
•
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Press FWD button or dial 554,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 42,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
:
B
/
C
3
D
E
F
4
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
5
J
K
L
j
k
l
5
6
7
M
P
N
Q
O
R
S
m
p
n
q
o
r
8
9
T
W
U
X
V
Y
Z
t
w
u
x
0
*
.
*
,
?
!
.
*
,
#
#
HOLD/SAVE ,
:
b
/
c
d
e
f
#
Character Entry Chart
to save the message.
29
<
1
@
A
Press
@
a
4
1
2
•
<
Num
1
2
3
s
6
7
v
y
z
8
9
?
!
0
*
#
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
4. PLACING A CALL
4. Placing
Calls
4.1 Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, begin
speaking with the called party.
4.1.1
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
30
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing the last digit of the Intercom number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
•
Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
•
Press the MSG button and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
•
•
Dial #,
After the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
4.1.2
Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the message icon
will be displayed in the LIP-8024D. If the ring/message
LED is set to Message Wait Indication, the
ring/message LED will flash.
To activate Message Waiting:
•
4.2
Press the MSG button and hang-up.
External Calls
4.2.1
Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access—
88 + Line number (01-10 for iPECS SBG-1000, 01-42
for iPECS-50 & 100, 001-200 for iPECS-300, 001400 for iPECS-600, or 001-600 for iPECS-1200).
31
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access—
801-805 for iPECS SBG-1000, 801-820 for iPECS- 50 &
100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600, or 8900`-89100
for iPECS-1200
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing (for banking
services, etc.).
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on
the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
32
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To place an external call:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number.
4.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
•
•
Select the desired CO/IP line button; when the busy notification
is returned, press the MSG button,
Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line is
available, the Station will be notified (ringing).
4.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. You may enter
an Account Code, which is output from the system to a
printer in the SMDR report. You may have an Account
Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex
buttons).
In iPECS-LIK
To enter an Account Code before the call:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
•
•
•
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *.
33
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To enter an Account Code before the call:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 550,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *, Interncom dial tone is heard,
Place the CO/IP call as normal.
4.2.4
Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the station’s Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization code,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5
Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization Code (station number and password),
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Place call as normal.
34
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
4.3
User Guide
Using Directory
4.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer. The iPECS Display Phone, the system will store
the numbers dialed on the last 15(iPECSLIK)/100(iPECS-MG) calls.
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 15 numbers dialed,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
or
press the LOG Soft button,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 100 numbers dialed or received,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.2
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external
call to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient
dialing at a later time. The Saved number is stored until
a new number is saved.
35
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial 1 for Station
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
•
While on an outgoing external call, press the Save Soft button.
4.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS SBG-1000 & Micro & 50 & 100 systems
each have memory allocated for 800 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The iPECS-300 system
has memory allocated for 3000 System Speed Dial
numbers (bins 2000-4999). The iPECS-600 system has
memory allocated for 6000 System Speed Dial
numbers (bins 2000-7999). The iPECS-1200 system
has memory allocated for 12000 System Speed Dial
numbers (bins 20000-31999). The iPECS-MG100
system has memory allocated for 1000 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999). The iPECS-MG300
system has memory allocated for 2000 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the DIR Soft button,
Press the speed button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial 2 for System
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for
iPECS SBG-1000 & Micro & 50 & 100, 2000-4999 for iPECS300, 2000-7999 for iPECS-600, 20000-31999 for iPECS12000, 2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 , or 2000-3999 for iPECSMG300).
36
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
4.3.4
User Guide
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100
System is allocated memory for 20 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 23 digits. The iPECS300 & 600 & 1200 support 100 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins 000-099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300
each support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins
000-049). These numbers are entered at the user’s
station and may include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
MSG as 1 digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad
Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
st
‘*’ not as 1 digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Dial Pad
button
Letter Type
Uppercase(ABC)
Lowercase(ABC)
Button depressions
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
@
A
:
B
/
C
3
D
E
4
G
5
6
<
1
@
a
:
b
/
c
F
d
e
f
3
H
I
g
h
i
4
J
M
K
N
L
O
j
m
k
n
l
o
5
6
7
8
P
T
Q
U
R
V
S
p
t
q
u
r
v
s
7
8
9
0
W
.
X
,
Y
?
Z
!
w
.
x
,
y
?
z
!
9
0
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
Character Entry Chart
37
<
Num
1
2
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK, & SBG)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 , 000099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and
Name:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Press the ADD Soft button,
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group, (Skip this step in iPECS SBG1000)
Dial the desired number to be stored,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
Chart,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex
button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Select the Tel Num Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
Number(iPECS-MG),
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group, (Skip this step in iPECS SBG1000)
Dial the desired number,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
chart(iPECS-LIK),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.5
Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the Intercom
directory, you must enter a name for your station (up to
12 characters).
38
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as in the
chart below.
A - 21
D - 31
Q – 11
B - 22
E - 32
Z – 12
C - 23
F - 33
. – 13
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
To place a call using Dial by Name:
•
•
•
•
Press DIR Soft button,
Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2: Public
directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will display the names
in alphabetical order,
Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys, or enter search
characters (refer to the above Character Entry Chart).
Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 74(iPECS-LIK)/34(iPECS SBG-1000)/12(iPECS-MG)
(Station User Name code),
Enter the Name, up to 12 characters (press DND button to
backspace/delete a character). To input characters:
Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or abc> mode,
To input the first character of a button, press the button 1 time
(ex., for ‘a’, press 2 button once),
To input the second character of a button, press the button 2
times (ex., for ‘b’, press the 2 button twice.
To input the third character of a button, press the button 3
times (ex., for ‘f’, press the 3 button three times.
Press HOLD/SAVE .
39
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
4.3.6
User Guide
Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)
When making an external call and a busy signal is
received, the system can be set to retry the number until
the call is connected, the feature is cancelled, or the
maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker
then place the call with the microphone muted. When
the remote end answers, you must select the MUTE
button, or lift the handset. Either of these actions will
cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the
remote party.
To set up ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
•
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu and select
the ACNR Soft button,
Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
•
Press the Stop Soft button.
40
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
5. Call
Handling
User Guide
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING
5.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different
destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, Call Transfer. You can screen
the transfer with the receiving party (Screened Call
Transfer) or complete the transfer without screening
(Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
•
•
•
•
5.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Call the transfer party,
Unscreened Call Transfer- Hang-up,
Screened Call Transfer– When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call and hang-up.
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive
rates for the holding station and other iPECS Phone
users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
41
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To place a call on Hold:
•
5.3
Press
HOLD/SAVE .
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls (Broker Call):
•
5.4
Press the desired CO/IP line button.
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 32 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
42
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To establish a Conference:
•
•
•
•
•
Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Establish call with the other conference party,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the
conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
•
Press the
HOLD/SAVE
button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
•
Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
•
•
•
Establish conference with two external parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Hand-up handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Select the Conf Soft button.
5.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 32
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
43
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room Number,
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
44
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
5.5
User Guide
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired user of
a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
To park an active external call:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100,
601-619 for iPECS-300 & 600 or 601-800 for iPECS-1200),
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit.
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
•
•
•
5.6
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your
Voice Mail Box.
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu and select
the Record Soft button, record warning tone is heard and
recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
•
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Record Soft button or,
Hang-up, return to idle.
45
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
6. Send &
Retrieve
Messages
User Guide
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting
Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication (MWI) when you do not answer or your phone
is in DND mode. The message icon will be displayed
on the LCD screen in LIP-8024D. If programmed, a
flashing MSG LED on the iPECS Phone also will
indicate when there is a Message Waiting. As a further
notification, a Message Wait Reminder Tone can be
provided. You may review and delete messages as well
as respond with a call back.
To review your Station messages:
•
•
•
Press the MSG button, the LCD shows the Message Summary
display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
BACK
OK
Dial 1 to view Station messages,
Press the navigation up/down button to scroll through the
messages.
To return a call from the list of Intercom (MWI):
•
•
Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through the
Intercom messages,
Press the OK Soft button to select and place the return call.
To delete a Station MWI:
•
•
•
Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through the
Station messages,
Press the Delete Soft button to select,
Dial 1 (Delete MWI).
To delete all Station MWIs:
•
•
Press the Delete Soft button,
Press 3 (Delete All MWIs).
46
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
6.2
User Guide
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
Box is part of the integrated VMIM/VSF/VMIB module,
the iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
The Voice Mail system allows access to and
management of received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
•
•
•
•
Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to
receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the MSG button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the flashing MSG button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation down key, to display additional items:
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)
BACK
OK
Dial 2 for VMIM/VSF, 3 for external VM or 4 for Feature Server
Voice Mail,
After the prompt enter your station number and password,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
47
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.3
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered by the
VMIM/VSF/VMIB Auto Attendant,
At answer,
dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt(iPECS-LIK &
SBG),
Or
dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),
Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up.
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (up to 100
alphanumeric characters) with other iPECS display
phone users. These messages will activate the
message icon on the LCD (LIP-8024D). If the
ring/message LED is set to Message Wait indication,
the ring/message LED will flash.
48
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 36 (SMS send code),
Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a new or
edit an existing message,
Enter the station range to receive the message, to send to a
single station enter the station number twice,
Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each character (refer
to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK) in Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
•
•
•
Press the MSG button, and press the Navigation down key four
times (LIP-8012D) or three times (LIP-8024D), the LCD will
display the Message Summary display,
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)
• BACK
OK
Dial 5; the first two (LIP-8012D) or three (LIP-8024D) SMS
messages are shown in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
•
•
Press the Delete Soft button,
Dial 1 to Delete the message, 2 to Cancel, or 3 to Delete all
received Short text messages.
49
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 43 (SMS send code),
Dial the station number to receive the message,
Press the Add Soft button to append the next station number
and Dial the station number,
Press the Finish Soft button,
Enter your mssage (refer to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-MG)
in Section 4.3.4),
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
•
•
•
Press the Msg Soft button, the LCD will display the Message
Summary display,
MWI(00) VMS(00) SMS(01)
ENTER (MWI:1, VMS:2, SMS:3)
•
Dial 3 to view the SMS message.
Press the Next Soft button to view the next SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
•
Press the Delete Soft button.
50
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
7. Remote
System
Access
User Guide
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc). The iPECS SBG-1000 system does
not support normal DISA service, but supports call to
the station and remote voice mail access when
answering by a VSF auto attendant.
In iPECS SBG-1000
To call to the station remotely:
•
•
Call the telephone number of a CO line assigned for answer by
a VSF auto attendant,
Upon answer, dial station number.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS-MG
To access system resources remotely:
•
•
•
•
7.2
Call the system’s DISA facility,
Await answer and dial your authorization code (station number
and password),
Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive iPECS calls on a registered mobile phone. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is only effective with an ISDN/VOIP CO line.
51
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
To register a mobile phone number: (iPECS-LIK)
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 37,
Dial the mobile phone number,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone: (iPECS-LIK)
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 38,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS System:
•
•
Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:
•
•
Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile may reconnect to the transfer
call by pressing the # key.
52
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 51,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s
station:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 52,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS System:
•
•
Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:
•
•
Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
53
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
8. Misc.
Features
User Guide
8. MISC. FEATURES
8.1 Call Log
Users can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls on the display (up to 99 records). A LOG Soft
button provides simple access to incoming (called),
outgoing (dialed) and missed (lost) calls.
NOTE—if a call is missed, the LOG Soft button will be
displayed as LOG(M); the missed call icon also will
appear on the LCD (LIP-8024D).
To access the Call Log menu:
•
•
•
Press the LOG Soft button,
Using the Navigation up/down keys, to view items (Called,
Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
• BACK SELECT
SEND ▶
Log codes include:
◀- Incoming call
▶- Outgoing call
- Missed call
To place a call using numbers stored in the Call Log:
•
•
From the Call Log, use the Navigation up/down keys, to view
items (Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
• BACK SELECT
SEND ▶
Highlight the desired item, and press the Send Soft button to
place the call.
To save an external call to the Station Speed Dial:
•
•
•
Use the Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the desired
external call item,
Press the Select Soft button,
Press the Save Soft button.
The CO code in a log item is used to seize the co line
when placing an external call using the call log. Up to 5
CO codes can be saved.
54
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
The first CO code is sent from the system in the saved
call log. Normally the first CO code is ‘9’, but if the
telephone number is equal to a number in the Speed
Dial list, the first CO code will be the access code of the
saved CO line of the speed dial. Therefore the first CO
code of each call log can be different and is not be
editable.
CO Codes 2 - 5 are the user-defined codes. If a code 2
- is selected, the selected code will be used in placing
all of the external calls in the call log.
To select a CO Code:
•
•
From the Call Log, use the right Navigation key, to advance to
the next 3 Soft button items,
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
• DEL CO CODE
Press the CO CODE Soft button (code displaying the + symbol
is the currently selected item),
•
1. +88001
2.
• 3.
• BACK EDIT
SELECT
To edit the CO code (positions 2-5 only):
•
•
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the desired item,
Press the Edit Soft button to modify selection.
To select the CO code:
•
•
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the desired item,
Press the Select Soft button.
55
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
8.2
User Guide
Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
LCD contrast can be adjusted to enhance viewing ability.
To change the LCD Contrast:
•
8.3
While in an idle state, press the VOL   buttons to adjust the
brightness.
- increase (darker)
- decrease (brighter)
Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to
callers placed on Hold.
There are eleven possible selections for BGM and MOH:
00: Off
01: Source BGM1
02: Source BGM2
03: VSF MOH 1
04: SLT MOH 1
05: SLT MOH 2
06: SLT MOH 3
07: SLT MOH 4
08: SLT MOH 5
09: VSF MOH 2
10: VSF MOH 3
To turn on Background Music:
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE
to cycle through the BGM selections.
56
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
8.4
User Guide
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers. Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS SBG-1000
& 50 & 100), 501-535 (iPECS-300 & 600), 301-400
(iPECS-1200)
Internal All Call Page 543
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the desired Page zone,
If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK &
SBG):
•
•
Press the MSG button,
Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/511(iPECS SBG-1000)/546(iPECS-MG)
(Meet-Me-Page code).
57
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
8.5
User Guide
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
•
•
Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
•
•
Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code,
Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
•
•
8.6
Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the
system. The alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or
as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM or Wake-Up Alarm announcement (iPECS-LIK &
iPECS SBG-1000) will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/21(iPECS SBG-1000)/13(iPECS-MG)
(Alarm Clock code),
Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
For a daily (repeating alarm), press #,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/22(iPECS SBG-1000)/14(iPECS-MG)
(Alarm Clock delete code),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
58
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
8.7
User Guide
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
•
Dial 565(iPECS-LIK & MG)/65(iPECS SBG-1000) (Alarm Stop
code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS-300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
8.8
Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is
implemented, an SLT is connected to a CO line by the
system. This SLT can be used as any normal SLT,
providing service while power is out.
8.9
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the iPECS
Phone speaker and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
59
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
To hear Date & Time memo:
•
•
Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-50 & 100, *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx
pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
•
•
Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-50 & 100, *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
•
•
Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-50 & 100, *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
Station Status Memo is heard.
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
8.10
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot
Desk operation. These Hot Desk phones let you log-on
and use the Hot Desk phone as if it were your station.
Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on the
attributes assigned to your station number and you can
make calls as normal. When logged-out, calls to your
station number are forwarded to the chosen destination.
60
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *0,
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial * twice,
Use the VOL   buttons to select a call forward destination
for your calls, speed dial, joined mobile phone, VMIM/VSF, or
VM group,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 525
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 525,
Input Call forward destination number optionally
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
61
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
9. PBX,
Centrex &
ISDN
User Guide
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex
CO line:
•
•
9.2
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Flash soft button,
After receiving new dial tone, dial the PBX/Centrex feature
code.
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial into
the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
62
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
•
•
Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
Dial as desired.
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
•
•
Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
Press a Feature or Flex button.
9.2.2
Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar
to those of Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary
services are provided on a subscription basis, and as
with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash button on
an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be
placed on Hold and a second call placed on the line.
You may then alternate between the two held calls
(Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line
conference can be established using the Flash and
Conf Soft buttons. A conference can also be placed on
hold.
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary
services:
•
•
Press Flash,
Press HOLD/SAVE , Conf, or CO line button to activate the
desired feature.
9.2.3
Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the far-end. This may be a subscription
service of your carrier. Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press programmed CLIR/COLR button to place call.
63
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
10. Features &
Flex Buttons
User Guide
10.
FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS
10.1Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B. In some cases, you
enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:
•
•
•
10.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone (possibly CO/IP lines).
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (ex., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code
(refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Dial desired code and required inputs; for User Program codes
Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
64
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
In iPECS-LIK & iPECS SBG-1000
Feature
iPECS
-50
iPECS
-100
iPECS
-300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
Intercom Call
100 149
801 –
820
100 169
801 820
100 399
801 872
1000 1599
801 872
Individual CO/IP Line
Access
8801 –
8842
8801 –
8842
Group Pilot Number
620 –
659
501 510
601 –
610
66
620 659
501 510
601610
66
88001
–
88200
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
88001
–
88400
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
1000 2199
89001
89200
88001
–
88600
401 500
301 400
601 800
*66
#*1
#*1 #*2
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
CO/IP Group Access
Internal Page Zone
Call Parking Locations
Station User
VMIM/VSF Features
Door Open
iPECS SBG1000
iPECS
SBG1000
10-33
801 805
8801 –
8810
620 –
631
501510
601 –
610
#*
Feature
iPECS-LIK
Remark
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
Last Number Redial
DND
543
544
545 - 546
548
549
550
551
552
553
52
53
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
Cancel DND/FWD
554
555
556
54
55
56
SLT use only
SLT use only
557
57
SLT use only
558
559
58
59
SLT use only
SLT use only
511
500
65
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only;
Toggle ON/OFF
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS-LIK
CO System Hold
Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off
Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue
Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held
CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
560
561
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
iPECS SBG1000
67
Remark
SLT use only
SLT use only
65
**
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
59
600
67
7
8*
8#
66
*#
7
8*
8#
9
9
0
*8
*9
*0
##
0
#0
66
SLT use only
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Code
Name
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
13
Personal VM Page
Announcement Page For
Attendant
Page Auto Answer
544
545
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
18
Internal-External Page All
Call Forward Register
549
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Register
514
14
15
Remark
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group
#
546
548
67
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
No
20
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
515
21
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Cancel
DND Status Change
22
23
24
25
26
DND Delete
Account Code
CO Flash
Last Number Redial
Station Speed PGM
517
550
551
552
553
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Speed Dial
MWI Register
MWI Answer
MWI Cancel
Call Back Register
Call Back Cancel
Group Call Pickup
Direct Call Pickup
Walking COS
Call Parking Location
555
557
558
559
518
519
564
7
520
541
37
38
PGM Mode Access
Two-Way Record
521
522
39
40
41
VMIB Access
AME Access
CO Line Access
523
524
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
Remark
516
68
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 :
MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG100)
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
*: Log out
47
48
49
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
Name Register
Create Conf Room
525
526
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Wake Up Register
Wake Up Cancel
Temporarily COS Down
Cancel Temp COS Down
Password Change
Inter-Phone Group Access
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
59
60
61
Forced Handsfree Call
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
537
582
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
69
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
70
Remark
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES
In iPECS-LIK
CODE
10
11 x
12 x
FUNCTION
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
30
31
32
52 xx
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL W AIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
REMARK
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring delay
(0-9)
Select download Ring Tone
0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
71
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
CODE
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
FUNCTION
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Network Configuration
Display Phone Version
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
*0
**
*7
*8
*9
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
Register Bluetooth
Bluetooth Usage
REMARK
Input up to 7 characters
Requires VSF/External SMDI
VM
In iPECS SBG-1000
Code
Function
11
Intercom Answer Mode
12
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
13
Select Headset Ring Type
72
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Remarks
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
0:Headset, 1:Speaker
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3:
both
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
Code
21
22
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
4*
50
51
52
53
53
User Guide
Function
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
LCD Display Language
SBG Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Display Phone Version
Network Configuration
Forced FWD to Destination
Call Log Display
CLIR Service
COLR Service
Assign LOOP Button
Assign CALL BACK Button
Assign CONF Button
Assign MUTE Button
Assign ICM Button
Assign REDIAL Button
Remarks
Input time, 24 hour clock
Input up to 12 characters
May require Authorization code
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
12 +
Name
13 +
Time
14
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
User name creation
2 digit for each character
Set wake-up alarm time
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Retrieve COS
Auth. Code required
LIP-Series Only
73
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
Code
User Guide
Function
Remarks
34
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 +
MSG
number
[xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom #
Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm
& Auth
Code
55 + Rm
& Auth
Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
Auth. Code required
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
74
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D
User Guide
Appendix C Useful Information : Open Source Software
Notice
Open Source Software Notice
This following GPL (General Public License) software used in this product
are subject to the GPL License Agreements.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL licenses from Ericsson-LG Web Site
(http://www.ericssonlg.com).
GPL License:
4. u-boot
5. bash
6. linux
7. busybox
8. Alsa Libraries
9. udhcpc
10. ortp
11. Curl / LibCurl
12. libsrtp
13. Expat xml parser
Ericsson-LG offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge
covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media,
shipping and handling upon e-mail request to Ericsson-LG at. :
[email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the
distribution of this product by Ericsson-LG.
75
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Please read this manual carefully before
operating Phone. Retain it for future reference
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
1.2
Date
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Oct. 2012
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Changed CI to Ericsson-LG
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or
disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright
Laws. Ericsson-LG reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without
notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG in this material is believed to be accurate and
reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. iPECS is trademarks of Ericsson-LG Co.,
Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only Ericsson-LG approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Only trained and qualified service personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
Do not spill liquid life water on the phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
If you see smoke or smell something during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center immediately.
If the power adapter is used, do not touch the plug with wet hands. This
may result in a fire or an electric shock or equipment damage.
Do not use the phone during a thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result in
fire, severe electrical or acoustic shock.
Do not use the power adapter if the power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric shock.
Ensure that children do not pull on phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause electric shock or damage the
equipment and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids such
as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do not clean with wax or silicon
products as these may enter the equipment and cause operation to become
unstable.
LIP-8040L
User Guide
[EU]
European Union Declarations of Conformity
Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. declare that the equipment specified in this document
bearing the “ CE” mark conforms to the European Union Radio and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive(R&TTE 1999/5/EC),
including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive(2004/108/EC) and Low
Voltage Directive(2006/95/EC).
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by
contacting your local sales representative.
[USA/CSA]
FCC/IC Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 /RSS-GEN of the FCC/IC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interference; and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely
outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the
Canadian regulations.
CAUTION : Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
LIP-8040L
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1
General ................................................................................. 1
Feature Information ................................................................... 1
Feature Groupings .................................................................... 2
iPECS LIP-8040L Phone Description .............................................. 2
LIP-8040L Phone Installation ....................................................... 3
1.5.1 Power .......................................................................... 4
1.5.2 Wall Mount .................................................................... 4
1.6 DSS (Direct Station Select) Console Installation ................................ 5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ............................................. 7
2.1 Using the LCD ......................................................................... 7
2.2 Display Menu .......................................................................... 7
2.2.1 Phone Setting ................................................................. 9
2.2.2 Conference Room (iPECS-LIK) .......................................... 11
2.2.3 ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK) .................................................... 12
2.2.4 Network Configuration ..................................................... 13
2.2.5 Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000) ..................... 15
2.3 Using the Speakerphone .......................................................... 16
2.4 Using a Serial DSS ................................................................. 18
3. RECEIVING CALLS ..................................................................................... 20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Answering a Call While Idle ....................................................... 20
Responding to a Call While Busy................................................. 21
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) ................................... 21
Differential Ring Signals ........................................................... 22
Answering Calls at Night ........................................................... 24
Answering Calls to Other Stations ............................................... 24
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls ........................ 24
Forwarding Calls .................................................................... 25
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail .................... 25
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number ................................ 26
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message .................................. 28
4. PLACING A CALL ....................................................................................... 32
4.1 Internal Calls ......................................................................... 32
4.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station .......................... 32
4.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait .................................................. 33
4.2 External Calls ........................................................................ 33
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls .......................................... 33
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ............................... 35
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing .................... 35
i
LIP-8040L
User Guide
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ......................................... 36
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone .................. 36
4.3 Using Directory ...................................................................... 36
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)........................................ 36
4.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ................................ 37
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers ..................................... 38
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ..................... 38
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name ........................ 40
4.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)...................... 42
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL ................................................. 44
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination........................ 44
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state ...................................... 44
Broker Call: Switching between two calls ....................................... 45
Joining Multiple People in a Conference ........................................ 45
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room .......................................... 46
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page ....................................... 47
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call .............................................. 48
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES................................................................... 49
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication......................... 49
6.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages ..................................................... 50
6.3 Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ................................. 51
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ......................................................................... 53
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................ 53
7.2 Mobile Phone Extension ........................................................... 53
8. MISC. FEATURES....................................................................................... 56
8.1 Call Log ............................................................................... 56
8.2 Contrast (iPECS-LIK)............................................................... 58
8.3 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK) .......................... 58
8.4 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging.................................. 59
8.5 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page ......................................................... 60
8.6 Wake-Up Alarm ..................................................................... 61
8.7 Alarm/Door Bell...................................................................... 61
8.8 Power Fail Transfer (PFT) ......................................................... 62
8.9 System Voice Memo ............................................................... 62
8.10 Hot Desk.............................................................................. 63
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ........................................................... 65
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex features ................................................. 65
9.2 Access the ISDN Network ......................................................... 65
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ................... 65
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services ................................... 66
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction ................................... 66
ii
LIP-8040L
User Guide
10. FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ..................................................................... 67
10.1 Entering Station Program Data ................................................... 67
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons .............................................. 67
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ....................................................... 68
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES.............................................................. 74
APPENDIX C USEFUL INFORMATION : OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE ......... 78
iii
LIP-8040L
User Guide
1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone Speakerphone,
moves on to receiving and placing calls, and then to
more advanced features. Each section includes a brief
and basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator, or the iPECS Technical
Manuals for further information).
NOTE—Under certain operating conditions, this
equipment may not be able to make emergency
calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for
access to emergency services.
1
LIP-8040L
1.3
User Guide
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving
Calls, Placing Calls, etc. Within each group, features
are arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1.4
iPECS LIP-8040L Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8040L Phone (shown) incorporate the
latest in VoIP technology and user interface to provide
you with a cost effective, simple to use, productive
communications tool. It includes a large 9-line 24character per line LCD (refer to Phone Diagrams, next
page). The bottom line of the display incorporates an
interactive menu accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just
below the display. The Navigation button in the lower
center of the Phone allows you to move through the
menu choices when more than three selections are
available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed
either using the Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting
a menu item using the Soft buttons. In the remainder of
this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown
with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double
underline.
LIP-8040L Phone Front and Back View
2
LIP-8040L
User Guide
LIP-8040L Phone Diagram
1.5
LIP-8040L Phone Installation
The phone handset is attached as shown (A). The LIP8040L has 2 RJ-45 and 10/100 Base-T LAN connection
ports (shown). One port is for connecting to the LAN (D),
and the other can be connected to a desktop data
device or PC (B), or another LAN interface terminal.
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
LIP-8040L Phone Connections
3
LIP-8040L
User Guide
1.5.1
Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A; shown “C” in
previous graphic) or over the LAN cable using the POE8
or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
NOTE—LIP-8000 series consoles are powered through
the flat cable used to connect the console to the IP
phone (shown). Up to 2(without LIP-8048DSS) or
4(with LIP-8048DSS) consoles can be chain-link
connected to the phone.
1.5.2
Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions describe how to
perform a wall mount installation. For more detailed
instruction, refer to the iPECS Hardware Description
and Installation Manual.
•
•
•
•
Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall
anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and
tighten the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8inch) of the screw exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure
the phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and
tighten or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
4
LIP-8040L
1.6
User Guide
DSS (Direct Station Select) Console Installation
A DSS console can be installed with the LIP-8000E series
phone as shown in Figure. Up to 3 consoles may be daisy
chained as shown using the flat cable provided. Keep in
mind the following conditions when installing LIP-8000
DSS consoles.
1. The AC/DC adapter must be used for LIP-8048DSS.
2. Up to two (2) LIP-8012LSS and/or LIP-8012DSS can be
installed with LIP-8000E Phone.
3. The LIP-8048DSS must be separately powered.
The available DSS is as follows:
1)
LIP-8012DSS
2)
LIP-8012LSS
3)
LIP-8048DSS
LIP-8000 DSS Installation
5
LIP-8040L
User Guide
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 48DSS)
LIP-8000 DSS Installation (12DSS + 12LSS)
6
LIP-8040L
User Guide
2. LCD,
Speakerphone
& Related
Featrues
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED
FEATURES
2.1
Using the LCD
The iPECS LIP-8040L has a large 9-line, 24 character
across Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) which is divided into
3 sections. The upper section consists of 3 lines. The
nd
rd
first line displays various icons. The 2 and 3 line are
used to convey information to you. They provide the
date, time and station number display while idle. It will
also provide called/calling name/number display, feature
status, etc.
The middle section displays the string of flex button or a
monthly calendar. The user can select by pressing
CALENDR Soft button of next page in idle state.
The lower section, which consists of a single line, is an
interactive menu to guide you through feature access
and User Program selections. The Navigation button is
used to move through Display Menu items.
STATION 1003 (T)
JUL 31 06
12:41 pm
CO 001
CO
CO 002
006
CO
CO 003
007
CO 004
CO
CO 005
008
CO
009
CO
010
FWD
DIR
LOG▶
2.2
Display Menu
With the Display Menu, you can access the Network
Configuration menu as well as other phone features
through simple menu trees. The Display Menu is
activated using the Menu button.
7
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
SELECT (0 - 4)
1. PHONE SETTING
2. CONFERENCE ROOM PGM
3. ICM SMS
4. NETWORK CONFIG
0. ATTENDANT
BACK
OK
NOTE—The ‘0. Attendant’ selection
display on the System Attendant phone.
will
only
In iPECS SBG-1000
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
SELECT (1 - 2)
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
OK
8
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate the Display Menu:
•
•
•
Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the OK Soft
button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
2.2.1
OK
EXIT
Phone Setting
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To configure the Phone:
•
•
Press MENU button and 1 (Phone Setting),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1 - 8)
1. STATION NAME PROGRAM
2. ICM RING
3. CO RING
4. PASSWORD PROGRAM
5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM
BACK
OK
SELECT (1 - 8)
6. STA RING DOWNLOAD
7. BACKLIGHT
8. FONT PROGRAM
BACK
OK
9
LIP-8040L
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Guide
Station Name Program—Input up to 12 digits using the keypad
(press DND button to backspace/delete a character), then press
the OK Soft button. To input characters:
o Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or abc>
mode,
o To input the first character of a button, press the
button 1 time (ex., for ‘a’, press 2 button once),
o To input the second character of a button, press the
button 2 times (ex., for ‘b’, press the 2 button twice.
o To input the third character of a button, press the
button 3 times (ex., for ‘f’, press the 3 button three
times.
ICM Ring/CO Ring—Use Next Soft button to move through list
of ring types, and press OK Soft button to select.
Password Program—Enter the current password and press the
OK Soft button, then enter the new password and press the OK
Soft button.
Language Program—Use Navigation up/down buttons to
highlight available languages supported, and press OK Soft
button to select.
Station Ring Download—Select the ring position (5-8) and
select the ring file; press the SAVE Soft button to select.
Backlight—Use Navigation up/down buttons to select the
operation of the backlight, and press the OK Soft button to
select.
Font Program— Use Navigation up/down buttons to select the
LCD Font, and press the OK Soft button to select.
In iPECS-MG
• Set Font Type—Select the font type(0 for new roman, 1 for
gothic), and press the OK Soft button to select.
• Set Contrast—Press the VOL   buttons or Use Navigation
up/down buttons to adjust the brightness, then press the OK
Soft button to select.
10
LIP-8040L
User Guide
2.2.2
Conference Room (iPECS-LIK)
The User can create and delete Conference rooms.
To configure a Conference Room:
•
•
Press MENU button and 2 (Conference Room),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. CREATE CONF ROOM
2. DELETE CONF ROOM
•
•
•
•
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and then press
the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection,
Enter the room number and dial the password,
Press the OK Soft button.
11
LIP-8040L
User Guide
2.2.3
ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK)
The user can send SMS messages to other stations and
retrieve received SMS messages.
To send a SMS message:
•
•
Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)
•
•
•
•
•
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and then press
the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial 1 to send a message,
Dial 1 if resending, or 2 to send a new message (edit),
Enter the Station number and message (if sending message),
Press the OK Soft button.
To retrieve a SMS message:
•
•
Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)
•
•
•
•
•
•
BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and then press
the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial 2 to retrieve a message.
Dial 1 to send a message,
Dial 1 if resending, or 2 to send a new message (edit),
Enter the Station number and message (if sending message),
Press the OK Soft button.
12
LIP-8040L
User Guide
2.2.4
Network Configuration
The User can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. settings:
 Press MENU button and 4(iPECS-LIK)/2(iPECS SBG-1000, iPECSMG),
 Enter the password (default=147*); the following will display:
MFIM #[1/2] ?
MFIM #1 - CHANGE[#]
 Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
 Press the VOL   buttons to advance to the next network
configuration item,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To configure 802.1x:
 In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the 802.1x
configuration screen (shown),
802.1x ?
[ENABLED] – CHANGE[#]
 Enable in 802.1x menu and press the Hold button.
 Enter ID in 802.1x USER ID menu (It appears when 802.1x is
enabled.) and press the Hold button.
 Enter Password in 802.1x PASSWORD menu (It appears when
802.1x is enabled.) and press the Hold button.
To set LLDP:
 In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the LLDP
configuration screen (shown),
LLDP?
[ENABLED] – CHANGE [#]
 Enable in LLDP? menu and press the Hold/Save button.
13
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To configure VPN:
 In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the DNS
Address menu.
 Enter DNS address in DNS ADDRESS menu
 Use VOL   buttons to locate the VPN configuration screen
(shown),
VPN ?
[ENABLED] – CHANGE[#]
 Enable in VPN Menu and press the Hold button.
 Following steps are available when VPN is enabled.
 Enter VPN Server address in VPN SERVER IP menu and press the
Hold button.
 Enter TCP/UDP port number for both local and remote in VPN PORT
and press the Hold button. The default value is 1194.
 In VPN USER ID, enter ID and press the Hold button.
 In VPN USER PASSWORD, enter Password and press the Hold
button.
To set default Config. settings:
 In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to locate the
Default Config. Screen (shown),
SET DEFAULT CONFIG(DOT:*)

 Press the * key.
To exit Config. settings:
 Press the SPEAKER button,
 Press the * key to exit,
OR
 Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new setting.
14
LIP-8040L
User Guide
2.2.5
Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000)
The Attendant menu is only available on the System
Attendant phone.
In iPECS-LIK
To access the Attendant menu:
•
•
From the Attendant Station phone, press the MENU button,
Press 0 (Attendant); the following will display:
SELECT (1 - 5)
1. DATE/TIME SET
2. SET ICM ONLY MODE
3. RESTORE COS
4. MONITOR CONF ROOM
5. DELETE CONF ROOM
BACK
OK
•
•
•
•
•
Date/Time Set—Enter mm/dd/yy, and press OK Soft button;
enter hh/mm, and press OK Soft button.
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM only calls
(ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS restoring (ex.,
103-108=103108), and press the OK Soft button.
Monitor Conference Room—Enter the Conference Room
number to view the number of attendees in the Conference
Room.
Delete Conference Room—Enter the Conference Room
number and press the OK Soft button to delete.
15
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS SBG-1000
To access the Attendant menu:
•
•
From the Attendant Station phone, press the MENU
button,
Press 0 (Attendant); the following will display:
SELECT (1 - 2)
1. SET ICM ONLY MODE
2. RESTORE COS
BACK
•
•
2.3
OK
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM
only calls (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS
restoring (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except
for Paging) in place of lifting the handset to receive or
place calls.
Additionally, you may switch between the handset and
Speakerphone during a call. By keeping the handset
Off-hook, the Group Listen feature is activated, which
provides incoming audio over the speaker with outgoing
audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to
listen to both sides of the conversation without
interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute
the microphone using the MUTE button. When Mute is
active, the MUTE button LED will be illuminated. To turn
off Mute, press the MUTE button again.
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a
feature by pressing its button will activate the
Speakerphone automatically.
16
LIP-8040L
User Guide
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the
ON/OFF-hook state for the phone.
To use the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
•
Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook and sends
audio to the speaker and the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
•
Press the VOL▲ VOL▼ button.
To Mute the microphone:
•
Select the MUTE button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):
•
Press the MUTE button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:
•
Press the
SPEAKER
button.
17
LIP-8040L
2.4
User Guide
Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012DSS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS
can be connected with the LIP-8040L using the RS-232
cable. Be sure to verify the serial DSS and LSS
capacities with the iPECS System to ensure usability
(refer to iPECS Manual). The following graphics show
the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a
serial DSS. iPECS SBG-1000 does not support serial
DSS.
LIP-8012DSS
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8048DSS
18
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To use a Serial DSS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM126,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM126.
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
•
•
Clear the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Admin PGM120-Felx3 to reset the phone.
In iPECS-LIK
To use a Serial DSS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verify the Station has Serial DSS Usage authority
(Admin PGM111-Flex21),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM115,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM129 (default label is
provided from MFIM).
To initialize Serial DSS Database:
•
•
•
Enter Admin PGM111-Flex21,
Select Station range to clear Serial DSS Database,
Dial 0, and press the HOLD/SAVE button.
19
LIP-8040L
User Guide
3. Receiving
Calls
3. RECEIVING CALLS
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line Preference;
in this case, calls that ring are answered by lifting the
handset. Otherwise, you must press the flashing Flex
button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line or a LOOP button.
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that
are programmed to ring at your phone. For external
calls, Delay Ring may be assigned allowing others to
answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc. will recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in Handsfree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available,
the name of the station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name
Display.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
•
Lift the handset or press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
•
•
In HF mode, simply speak as normal into the
microphone,
OR
In PV mode, lift the handset to respond.
20
LIP-8040L
3.2
User Guide
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. In this case, audio is received from both
the active call and the Voice Over announcement at the
same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of
several ways; place the existing call on Hold and
respond to the new incoming call, activate One-time
DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new
call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
•
•
Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:
•
Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
•
•
3.3
Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
Select the desired message to send.
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can
screen the call as if using a normal Answering Machine.
The caller’s voice is played over your speaker while the
message is being recorded. There are two methods of
notification and call screening provided, Ring or
Speaker mode.
Ring mode (iPECS-LIK & SBG)/LED Blink Mode
(iPECS-MG)—the Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
Flex button will flash to notify you of a call. You may
21
LIP-8040L
User Guide
press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice
message is stored.
Speaker mode (iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Speaker Hearing
Mode (iPECS-MG)—when the call is sent to the voice
mailbox, the caller’s voice is automatically broadcast
over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice
mail to record a message, talk with the caller and record
the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and
disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is only
available when using the iPECS VMIM/VSF Voice Mail;
a MUTE and AME button should be programmed (refer
to Appendix A User Program Codes).
To screen a call in Ring mode(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/LED blink
mode(iPECS-MG):
•
Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast
over the station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the
Speaker mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
•
Press the illuminated
SPEAKER
button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail:
•
Press the
MUTE
button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
•
3.4
Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and
the Voice Mail disconnected.
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
th
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5 to
th
8 Ring Tone.
22
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
23
LIP-8040L
3.5
User Guide
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
•
•
3.6
Lift the handset,
Dial 567 (iPECS-Lik)/ 587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the call will be
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
•
•
3.7
Lift the handset,
Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb when you wish to not be
interrupted; the phone will block incoming calls. Internal
callers will receive a fast busy tone and the display will
show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while
ringing(One-Time DND); Ringing terminates and the
caller will get a fast busy tone and it requires a DND
button.
24
LIP-8040L
User Guide
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
•
3.8
Press the DND button.
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1
Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except
recalls, when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
25
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or
internal system resource:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone
within the System (Call Forward, Remote):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
Press the # key.
3.8.2
Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be
forwarded from an internal station or a remote location.
You may define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as
listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
26
LIP-8040L
User Guide
3:
4:
No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, enter your Authorization Code. In
addition, from a remote location, you must access the
system through a DISA enabled CO line.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone within the System:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
While receiving dial-tone, dial 554 (Call Forward feature code),
Dial your Authorization Code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (6-9),
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
27
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3
Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to internal callers. When calling
your Station, internal callers will automatically receive
the selected message or you can send a text message
you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text Messages;
some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown
in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 03:
Message 04:
Message 05:
28
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
29
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 51,
Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
•
•
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 52,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
30
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 41,
Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
•
•
•
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Press FWD button or dial 554,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 42,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
:
B
/
C
3
D
E
F
4
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
5
J
K
L
j
k
l
5
6
7
M
P
N
Q
O
R
S
m
p
n
q
o
r
8
9
T
W
U
X
V
Y
Z
t
w
u
x
0
*
.
*
,
?
!
.
*
,
#
#
HOLD/SAVE ,
:
b
/
c
d
e
f
#
Character Entry Chart
to save the message.
31
<
1
@
A
Press
@
a
4
1
2
•
<
Num
1
2
3
s
6
7
v
y
z
8
9
?
!
0
*
#
LIP-8040L
User Guide
4. Placing Calls
4. PLACING A CALL
4.1
Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
touch of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, begin
speaking with the called party.
4.1.1
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
32
LIP-8040L
User Guide
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing the last digit of the Intercom number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
•
Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
•
Press the MSG button and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
•
•
Dial #,
After the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
4.1.2
Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the message icon
will be displayed. If the ring/message LED is set to
Message Wait Indication, the ring/message LED will
flash.
To activate Message Waiting:
•
4.2
When calling a number that is busy or in DND mode, press the
MSG button and hang-up.
External Calls
4.2.1
Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access—
33
LIP-8040L
User Guide
88 + Line number (01-10 for iPECS SBG-1000, 01-42
for iPECS-50 & 100, 001-200 for iPECS-300, 001400 for iPECS-600, or 001-600 for iPECS-1200).
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access—
801-805 for iPECS SBG-1000, 801-820 for iPECS- 50 &
100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600, or 8900`-89100
for iPECS-1200
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing (for banking
services, etc.).
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
34
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To place an external call:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number.
4.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line is available for use.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
•
•
Select the desired CO/IP line button; when the busy notification
is returned, press the MSG button,
Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line is
available, the Station will be notified (ringing).
4.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. You may enter
an Account Code, which is output from the system to a
printer in the SMDR report. You may have an Account
Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex
buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
•
•
•
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *.
35
LIP-8040L
User Guide
4.2.4
Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the station’s Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization code,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5
Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the Flash Soft button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
•
•
•
•
•
4.3
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
Dial your Authorization Code (station number and password),
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
Place call as normal.
Using Directory
4.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer. The iPECS Display Phone, the system will store
36
LIP-8040L
User Guide
the numbers dialed on
LIK)/100(iPECS-MG) calls.
the
last
15(iPECS-
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 15 numbers dialed,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
or
press the LOG Soft button,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 100 numbers dialed or received,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.2
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial 1 for
Station Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
•
While on an outgoing external call, press the Save Soft
button.
37
LIP-8040L
User Guide
4.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS SBG-1000 & Micro & 50 & 100 system has
memory allocated for 800 System Speed Dial numbers
(bins 200-999). The iPECS-300 system has memory
allocated for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-4999). The iPECS-600 system has memory
allocated for 6000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-7999). The iPECS-1200 system has memory
allocated for 12000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
20000-31999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press the DIR Soft button,
Press the speed button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial 2 for
System Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200999 for iPECS SBG-1000 & Micro & 50 & 100, 20004999 for iPECS-300, 2000-7999 for iPECS-600, 2000031999 for iPECS-12000 ,2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 ,
or 2000-3999 for iPECS-MG300).
4.3.4
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100
System is allocated memory for 20 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 23 digits. The iPECS300 & 600 & 1200 support 100 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins 000-099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300
each support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins
000-049). These numbers are entered at the user’s
38
LIP-8040L
User Guide
station and may include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
MSG as 1 digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad
Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
st
‘*’ not as 1 digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16-character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as shown.
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
<
@
a
:
b
/
c
d
e
f
Num
4
1
2
@
A
:
B
/
C
3
D
E
F
4
G
H
I
g
h
i
4
5
6
J
M
K
N
L
O
j
m
k
n
l
o
5
6
7
8
P
T
Q
U
R
V
S
p
t
q
u
r
v
s
7
8
9
0
W
.
X
,
Y
?
Z
!
w
.
x
,
y
?
z
!
9
0
*
#
*
#
*
#
Character Entry Chart
39
<
1
1
2
3
*
#
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK & SBG)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Press the ADD Soft button,
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group, (Skip this step in iPECS SBG1000)
Dial the desired number to be stored,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
Chart,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Select the Tel Num Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
Number(iPECS-MG),
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group, (Skip this step in iPECS SBG1000)
Dial the desired number,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
chart(iPECS-LIK),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.5
Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the Intercom
directory, you must enter a name for your station (up to
12 characters).
40
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
41
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To place a call using Dial by Name:
•
•
•
•
Press DIR Soft button,
Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2: Public
directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will display the names
in alphabetical order,
Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys, or enter search
characters (refer to the above Character Entry Chart).
Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 74(iPECS-LIK)/34(iPECS SBG-1000)/12(iPECS-MG)
(Station User Name code),
• Enter the Name, up to 12 characters (press DND button to
backspace/delete a character):
- To input alphabet
nd
1. Select ABC> or abc> mode by pressing 2 Soft
Button,
st
2. To input 1 character in each dial button(2~9), press
the button, once,
nd
To input 2 character, press the button, twice,
rd
To input 3 character, press the button, three times,
(Ex., To input ‘K’, press the ‘5’ button, twice).
3. To input a character in the same button, continuously
press the button after 2 seconds.
(Ex., in case of KL, press the ‘5’ button twice, then
wait 2 seconds and press the ‘5’ button three times).
• Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6
Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)
When making an external call and a busy signal is
received, the system can be set to retry the number until
the call is connected, the feature is cancelled, or the
maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker
then place the call with the microphone muted. When
the remote end answers, you must select the MUTE
button, or lift the handset. Either of these actions will
cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the
remote party.
42
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To set up ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
•
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu
and select the ACNR Soft button,
Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
•
Press the Stop Soft button.
43
LIP-8040L
User Guide
5. Call
Handling
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a
different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, Call Transfer. You can screen
the transfer with the receiving party (Screened Call
Transfer) or complete the transfer without screening
(Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
•
•
•
•
5.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Call the transfer party,
Unscreened Call Transfer- Hang-up,
Screened Call Transfer– When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call then hang-up.
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
To place a call on Hold:
•
Press
HOLD/SAVE .
44
LIP-8040L
5.3
User Guide
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties (Broker Call). iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls (Broker Call):
•
5.4
Press the desired CO/IP line button.
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 32 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
To establish a Conference:
•
•
•
•
•
Establish call with one of the desired conference
parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Establish call with the other conference party,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the
conference.
45
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To place a Conference on Hold:
•
Press the
HOLD/SAVE
button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
•
Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
•
•
•
Establish conference with two external parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Hang-up the handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Select the Conf Soft button.
5.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 32
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room Number,
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
46
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
•
•
•
•
•
5.5
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired user of
a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To park an active external call:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS SBG-1000 & 50 & 100,
or 601-619 for iPECS-300 & 600 or 601-800 for iPECS-1200),
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit.
47
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
•
•
•
5.6
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your
Voice Mail Box.
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu and select
the Record Soft button, record warning tone is heard and
recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
•
•
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Record Soft button or,
Hang-up, return to idle.
48
LIP-8040L
User Guide
6. Send &
Retrieve
Messages
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES
6.1 Responding to a Station Message
Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication (MWI) when you do not answer or your phone
is in DND mode. The message icon will be displayed on
the LCD screen. If programmed, a flashing MSG LED
on the iPECS Phone also will indicate when there is a
Message Waiting. As a further notification, a Message
Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may
review and delete messages as well as respond with a
call back.
To review your Station messages:
•
Press the MSG button, the LCD shows the Message Summary
display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(00)
BACK
OK
•
•
Dial 1 to view Station messages,
Press the navigation up/down button to scroll through the
messages.
To return a call from the list of Intercom (MWI):
•
•
Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through the
Intercom messages,
Press the OK Soft button to select and place the return call.
To delete a Station MWI:
•
•
•
Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through the
Station messages,
Press the Delete Soft button to select,
Dial 1 (Delete MWI).
To delete all Station MWIs:
•
•
Press the Delete Soft button,
Press 3 (Delete All MWIs).
49
LIP-8040L
6.2
User Guide
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message, as part of the
integrated VMIM/VSF/VMIB module, the iPECS
Feature Server or an external Voice Mail system.
The Voice Mail system allows access to and
management of received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
•
•
•
•
Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to
receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the MSG button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the flashing MSG button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(00)
BACK
OK
Dial 2 for VMIM/VSF, 3 for external VM or 4 for Feature Server
Voice Mail, etc.
After the prompt enter your station number and password,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to
receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
50
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.3
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered by the
VMIM/VSF/VMIB Auto Attendant,
At answer,
dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt
(iPECS-LIK & SBG),
dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),,
Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up.
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (up to 100
alphanumeric characters) with other iPECS display
phone users. If there are messages, the message icon
will be displayed on the LCD screen in LIP-8024D. If the
ring/message LED is set to Message Wait Indication
(PGM111-FLEX10), the ring/message LED will flash.
In iPECS-LIK
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display Phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 36 (SMS send code),
Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a new or
edit an existing message,
Enter the station range to receive the message, to send to a
single station enter the station number twice,
Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each character (refer
to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK) in Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
51
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To view your received Short text messages:
•
•
•
Press the MSG button, the LCD will display the Message
Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)
BACK
OK
Dial 5; the first few SMS messages are shown in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
•
•
Press the DELETE Soft button,
Dial 1 to Delete the message, 2 to Cancel, or 3 to Delete all
received Short text messages.
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display Phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 43 (SMS send code),
Dial the station number to receive the message,
Press the Add Soft button to append the next station number
and Dial the station number,
Press the Finish Soft button,
Enter your mssage (refer to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-MG)
in Section 4.3.4),
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
•
Press the Msg Soft button, the LCD will display the Message
Summary display,
MWI(00) VMS(00) SMS(01)
ENTER (MWI:1, VMS:2, SMS:3)
•
•
Dial 3 to view the SMS message.
Press the Next Soft button to view the next SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
•
Press the Delete Soft button.
52
LIP-8040L
User Guide
7. Remote
System Access
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS
7.1
(DISA)
Direct Inward System Access
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc). The iPECS SBG-1000 system does
not support normal DISA service, but supports call to
the station and remote voice mail access when
answering by a VSF auto attendant.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS-MG
To call to the station remotely:
•
•
Call the telephone number of a CO line assigned for answer by
a VSF auto attendant,
Upon answer, dial station number.
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS-MG
To access system resources remotely:
•
•
•
•
7.2
Call the system’s DISA facility,
Await answer and dial your authorization code (station number
and password),
Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG)
Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive iPECS calls on a registered mobile phone. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
53
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
To register a mobile phone number: (iPECS-LIK)
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 37,
Dial the mobile phone number,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone: (iPECS-LIK)
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 38,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
System:
•
•
Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system
will check the Caller ID and answer the call. The user
then will receive intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:
•
•
•
Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and
the mobile phone returns to idle.
Reconnect to the transfer by pressing the # key.
NOTE— This feature is only effective with an ISDN
CO line.
54
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 51,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 52,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
•
•
Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
•
•
Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
55
LIP-8040L
User Guide
8. Misc.
Features
8. MISC. FEATURES
8.1
Call Log
Users can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls on the display (up to 99 records). A LOG Soft
button provides simple access to incoming (called),
outgoing (dialed) and missed (lost) calls.
NOTE—if a call is missed, the LOG Soft button will be
displayed as LOG(M); the missed call icon also will
appear on the LCD.
To access the Call Log menu:
•
•
•
Press the LOG Soft button,
Use the Navigation up/down keys, to view items
(Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
BACK
SELECT SEND
▶
Log codes include:
◀- Incoming call
▶- Outgoing call
- Missed call
To place a call using numbers stored in the Call Log:
•
•
From the Call Log, use the Navigation up/down keys, to
view items (Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
BACK
SELECT SEND
▶
Highlight the desired item, and press the Send Soft
button to place the call.
56
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To save an external call to the Station Speed dial:
•
•
•
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired external call item,
Press the Select Soft button,
Press the Save Soft button.
The CO code in a log item is used to seize the co line
when placing an external call using the call log. Up to 5
CO codes can be saved.
The first CO code is sent from the system in the saved
call log. Normally the first CO code is ‘9’, but if the
telephone number is equal to a number in the Speed
Dial list, the first CO code will be the access code of the
saved CO line of the speed dial. Therefore the first CO
code of each call log can be different and is not be
editable.
CO Codes 2 - 5 are the user-defined codes. If a code 2 is selected, the selected code will be used in placing all
of the external calls in the call log.
To select a CO Code:
•
•
From the Call Log, use the right Navigation key, to
advance to the next 3 Soft button items,
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
DEL
CO CODE
Press the CO CODE Soft button (code displaying the +
symbol is the currently selected item),
1. +88001
2.
3.
4.
5.
BACK
EDIT
SELECT
57
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To edit the CO code (positions 2-5 only):
•
•
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Edit Soft button to modify selection.
To select the CO code:
•
•
8.2
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Select Soft button.
Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
LCD contrast can be adjusted to enhance viewing ability.
To change the LCD Contrast:
•
8.3
While in an idle state, press the VOL  VOL  buttons
to adjust the brightness.
- increase (darker)
- decrease (brighter)
Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are eleven possible selections for BGM and MOH:
00: Off
01: Source BGM1
02: Source BGM2
03: VSF MOH 1
04: SLT MOH 1
05: SLT MOH 2
06: SLT MOH 3
07: SLT MOH 4
08: SLT MOH 5
09: VSF MOH 2
10: VSF MOH 3
58
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To turn on Background Music:
•
8.4
Press
HOLD/SAVE
to cycle through the BGM selections.
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS SBG-1000
& 50 & 100), 501-535 (iPECS-300 & 600), 301-400
(iPECS-1200)
Internal All Call Page 543
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
59
LIP-8040L
User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial the desired Page zone,
If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK & SBG):
•
•
Press the MSG button,
Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
•
•
8.5
Lift the handset.
Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/511(iPECS SBG-1000)/546(iPECS-MG)
(Meet-Me-Page code).
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
•
•
Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
•
•
Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code,
Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
•
•
Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
60
LIP-8040L
8.6
User Guide
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the
system. The alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or
as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 41(iPECS-LIK) )/21(iPECS SBG-1000)/13(iPECSMG) (Alarm Clock code),
Dial 2-digit hour and minute (hh/mm) for alerting,
For a daily (repeating alarm), press #,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
•
•
•
8.7
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/22(iPECS SBG-1000)/14(iPECSMG) (Alarm Clock delete code),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
•
Dial 565(iPECS-LIK & MG)/65(iPECS SBG-1000) (Alarm
Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
61
LIP-8040L
User Guide
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS -300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
8.8
Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
8.9
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the iPECS
Phone speaker and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
62
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To hear Date & Time memo:
•
•
Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *661
for iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx
pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
•
•
Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
•
•
Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-50 & 100, or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
Station Status Memo is heard.
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
8.10 Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot
Desk operation. These Hot Desk phones let you log-on
and use the Hot Desk phone as if it were your station.
Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on the
attributes assigned to your station number and you can
make calls as normal. When logged-out, calls to your
station number are forwarded to the chosen destination.
In iPECS-LIK
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *0,
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial * twice,
Use the VOL   buttons to select a call forward destination
for your calls, speed dial, joined mobile phone, VMIM/VSF, or
VM group,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
63
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Dial 525
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 525,
Input Call forward destination number optionally
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
64
LIP-8040L
User Guide
9. PBX,
Centrex &
ISDN
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES
9.1
Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
•
•
•
Lift the handset,
Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
•
•
9.2
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Flash soft button,
After receiving new dial tone, dial the PBX/Centrex feature
code.
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial into
the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
65
LIP-8040L
User Guide
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
•
•
Press the programmed
keypad mode,
Dial as desired.
KEYPAD FACILITY
button to switch to
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
•
•
Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
Press a Feature or Flex button.
9.2.2
Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar
to those of Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary
services are provided on a subscription basis, and as
with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash button on an
iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be
placed on Hold and a second call placed on the line.
You may then alternate between the two held calls
(Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line
conference can be established using the Flash and Conf
Soft buttons. A conference can also be placed on hold.
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary services:
•
•
Press Flash,
Press HOLD/SAVE , Conf, or CO line button to activate the
desired feature.
9.2.3
Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the far-end. This may be a subscription
service of your carrier. Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
•
•
Lift the handset,
Press programmed CLIR/COLR button to place call.
66
LIP-8040L
User Guide
10. Features &
Flex Buttons
10.
FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS
10.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B. In some cases, you
enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone (possibly CO/IP lines).
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (ex., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code
(refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Dial desired code and required inputs; for User Program codes
Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
67
LIP-8040L
User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
In iPECS-LIK, iPECS SBG-1000
Feature
iPECS
-50
iPECS
-100
iPECS
-300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
Intercom Call
100 149
801 –
820
100 169
801 820
100 399
801 872
1000 1599
801 872
Individual CO/IP Line
Access
8801 –
8842
8801 –
8842
Group Pilot Number
620 –
659
501 510
601 –
610
66
620 659
501 510
601610
66
88001
–
88200
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
88001
–
88400
620 667
501 535
601 619
*66
1000 2199
89001
89200
88001
–
88600
401 500
301 400
601 800
*66
#*1
#*1 #*2
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
#*1 #*4
CO/IP Group Access
Internal Page Zone
Call Parking Locations
Station User
VMIM/VSF Features
Door Open
801 805
8801 –
8810
620 –
631
501510
601 –
610
#*
Feature
iPECS-LIK
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
Last Number Redial
DND
543
544
545 - 546
548
549
550
551
552
553
52
53
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
Cancel DND/FWD
554
555
556
54
55
56
SLT use only
SLT use only
557
57
SLT use only
558
559
58
59
SLT use only
SLT use only
68
iPECS SBG1000
iPECS
SBG1000
10-33
Remark
511
500
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only
SLT use only;
Toggle ON/OFF
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Feature
iPECS-LIK
CO System Hold
Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off
Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue
Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held
CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
560
561
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
iPECS SBG1000
67
Remark
SLT use only
SLT use only
65
**
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
59
600
67
7
8*
8#
66
*#
7
8*
8#
9
9
0
*8
*9
*0
##
0
#0
69
SLT use only
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Name
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
2
Attendant Call
Conference Room 1
0
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
Remark
543 + 00,
xx
00: All Call
Page
Xx: Page
Group #
548
70
554 + Type
+
LIP-8040L
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
Destination
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
38
39
40
41
PGM Mode Access
Two-Way Record
VMIB Access
AME Access
CO Line Access
521
522
523
524
88
71
514 + Type
+
Destination
541 + xx
Xx:
Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO
Line #
(001 ~
200 : MG300
01 ~
80 : MG-
LIP-8040L
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
100)
42
43
44
45
46
VM MWI Enable
VM MWI Cancel
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conf Extend
PTT Group Access
*8
*9
*0
5##
524
47
48
49
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
Name Register
Create Conf Room
525
526
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
53
Wake Up Cancel
Temporarily COS Down
530
531
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Cancel Temp COS Down
Password Change
Inter-Phone Group Access
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
Forced Handsfree Call
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
COLR Access
Pilot Hunt Call
Command Call Oneway
Command Call Conf
Intrude Register
532
533
534
535
536
537
582
583
584
585
581
580
589
72
524 +
(0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 +
Conf.
Room #
528 +
Conf.
Room #
529 +
HH:MM
LIP-8040L
No
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Camp On Register
OHVO Register
Mobile Num Register
Mobile CLI Register
Mobile Access
CCR Access
CCR Access And Drop
System Hold
Return Held CO
Sys Memo
DISA Tone Service
All Feature Cancel
Add Conf Member
System Alarm Reset
Fault Alarm Reset
Door Open
Keypad Facility
T-Net Log-In/Out
Universal Answer
USB Call Record
Delete All VM Message
VM Page Message Record
Direct VM Transfer
Loop Key
Call Log
590
591
592
593
594
670
671
560
8**
675
678
679
680
565
566
#*1
##*
586
587
588
681
682
683
684
685
73
Remark
LIP-8040L
User Guide
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES
In iPECS-LIK
CODE
10
11 x
12 x
FUNCTION
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
30
31
32
52 xx
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL W AIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
LCD Display Mode
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
REMARK
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring delay
(0-9)
Select download Ring Tone
0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
74
LIP-8040L
User Guide
CODE
72
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
FUNCTION
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Network Configuration
Display Phone Version
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
*0
**
*7
*8
*9
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
Register Bluetooth
Bluetooth Usage
REMARK
Input up to 12 characters
Requires VSF/External SMDI
VM
75
LIP-8040L
User Guide
In iPECS SBG-1000
Code
Function
11
Intercom Answer Mode
12
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
13
Select Headset Ring Type
21
22
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
4*
50
51
52
53
53
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
LCD Display Language
SBG Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Display Phone Version
Network Configuration
Forced FWD to Destination
Call Log Display
CLIR Service
COLR Service
Assign LOOP Button
Assign CALL BACK Button
Assign CONF Button
Assign MUTE Button
Assign ICM Button
Assign REDIAL Button
Remarks
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
0:Headset, 1:Speaker
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3:
both
Input time, 24 hour clock
Input up to 12 characters
May require Authorization code
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
76
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Code
Function
Remarks
23
Ring Download
LIP-Series Only
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
SMS Message Protect
33
Auth. Code required
Set Pre-defined Message.
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
43
Create a Station User
Message
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
Register the mobile CLI
number
X=1-2
42
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
X=1-2
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
77
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Appendix C Useful Information : Open Source Software
Notice
Open Source Software Notice
This following GPL (General Public License) software used in this product
are subject to the GPL License Agreements.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL licenses from Ericsson-LG Web Site
(http://www.ericssonlg.com).
GPL License:
1. u-boot
2. bash
3. linux
4. busybox
5. Alsa Libraries
6. udhcpc
7. ortp
8. Curl / LibCurl
9. libsrtp
10. Expat xml parser
Ericsson-LG offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge
covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media,
shipping and handling upon e-mail request to Ericsson-LG at. :
[email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the
distribution of this product by Ericsson-LG.
78
● IP KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM / SLT User Guide iPECS-50/100/300/600/1200
SLT User Guide for iPECS System
To activate Call Forward to Voice Mail Group,
● Lift handset.
● Dial 5 5 4.
● Dial Call Forward type number (1~4)
● Dial Voice Mail Group Number.
● Hang up.
To deactivate Call Forward to VMIB,
Lift handset.
● Dial 5 5 4.
● Dial # .
● Hang up.
●
To hear the recorded voice Message,
Lift handset.
● Dial the Voice Mail Group
to receive the “Mailbox & Password” prompt.
● Dial the station number and authorization code
to receive the “Number of Messages” prompt.
● Dial ‘1’, for hearing voice message.
● To hear current voice message again, dial 1.
● To save current voice message and hear next
message, dial 2.
● To delete current voice message, dial 3.
● To forward current voice message, dial 4.
● To call sender of voice message, dial 5.
● To skip current voice message
and hear next message, dial 6.
● To add preamble memo on voice message, dial 7.
●
Programming Authorization Code
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 6 1, the SLT Programming code.
Dial 3 3, the Station User Program code.
Dial Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits) .
Momentarily press the Hook-switch
receive confirmation tone
Following features are only available with iPECS
Hotel S/W.
Baby Listening
This feature allows a guest to monitor his room from any
other party of the hotel. You can hear the room which is
set baby listening but the room will not be disturbed.
To activate baby listening at guest’s room,
● Lift the handset.
● Dial the guest’s own room number.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To cancel baby listening at guest’s room,
Replace the handset.
●
To operate baby listening from any other phone in the
system,
● Lift the handset.
● Dial the guest’s own room number.
● DND tone will be heard and dial the guest’s own room
number again.
● After confirmation tone, baby listening is operated.
Maid Status
The Maid can update the maid status of any room.
To register “Cleaned” at a guest station,
● Dial SLT PGM code.
● Dial 6 4.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To register “Dirty” at a guest station,
Dial SLT PGM code.
● Dial 6 5.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
●
Programming Your Name
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 6 1, the SLT Programming code.
Dial 7 4, the SLT Name Program Code.
Enter name, refer Alphanumeric Chart.
Momentarily press the Hook-switch
receive confirmation tone
Entering an Account Code
To identify a call, system provides the user with an
account code field in the Call Logging printout by
entering an account code while on an outside call.
After dialing or during a conversation with an
external party,
● Press hook switch.
● Dial 550 and account code.
(An account code can be up to 12 digits.)
● Press ‘*’.
● Continue conversation and hang up to finish the
call.
Handset Off-hook Alarm
Should the handset be left off the cradle unattended,
for any length of time, the user will receive a high
pitched signal.
● To cancel the signal, hang up.
4
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement